W 463 Manual

G-Class Owner's Manual
Nur fuer internen Gebrauch
Thank you for choosing Mercedes-Benz. Before you drive off, get to know your Mercedes-Benz and read this Owner's Manual. This will help you to obtain the maximum pleasure from your vehicle and avoid endangering yourself and others. Items of optional equipment are marked with an asterisk *. The equipment in your vehicle may vary, depending on the model, availability and country specifications. Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art and therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in design, equipment and technical features at any time.
You cannot, therefore, base any claims on the data, illustrations or descriptions in this Owner's Manual. The Owner's Manual, the brief instructions, the "Services" booklet and the "Service Centres" booklet are an integral part of the vehicle. These should therefore always be kept in the vehicle and passed on to the new owner if you sell the vehicle. Please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if you have any questions. The technical documentation team at DaimlerChrysler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring.
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 The aim of this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Protection of the environment . . . . . . 12 Operating safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Correct use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-function steering wheel . . . . . . . Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upper section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lower section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overhead control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . Door control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 16 18 20 21 21 22 23 24
Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wearing seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulling away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching on the headlamps . . . . . Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25 26 26 27 27 29 30 31 31 35 36 36 37 39 40 41 41 44
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . Driving safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . . ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-ETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-theft systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . Tow-away protection* . . . . . . . . . . Interior motion sensor* . . . . . . . . .
45 46 47 51 61 71 71 72 72 73 76 76 76 77 78
Contents
Controls in detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Key with remote control . . . . . . . . 82 Opening a door from the inside . . . 85 Opening the rear door . . . . . . . . . . 86 Closing the rear door . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Opening the tailgate (Cabriolet) . . . 89 Closing the tailgate (Cabriolet) . . . 91 Automatic locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Multi-contour seat* . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Seat heating* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Folding down the front seat backrests (easy-entry function) Short-wheelbase station wagon and Cabriolet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Easy-entry feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Rear bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Side-facing rear bench seat* in the luggage compartment . . . . . . 100
Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Calling up the stored positions . . 102 Exterior mirror parking position . . 103 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Loading guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Safety net* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Luggage compartment cover . . . . 111 Stowage boxes* in the shortwheelbase station wagon . . . . . . . 112 Ski holder* and roof rack* . . . . . . 113 Trailer tow hitch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Exterior lighting delayed switch-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Locator lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Remote-operated illuminated entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Adjusting the headlamp range . . . 119 Combination switch . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Hazard warning lamps . . . . . . . . . 121 Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Adjusting the instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Resetting the trip meter . . . . . . . . 127 Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Outside temperature display . . . . 127 Operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . 129 Multi-function steering wheel . . . . 130 Menus on vehicles with a COMAND system* installed . . . . . 132 Audio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Navigation* menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Malfunction memory menu . . . . . 137 Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Trip computer menu . . . . . . . . . . . 157 TEL* menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . 166 One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . . 166 Shift ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Contents
Transfer case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shift ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer case switch . . . . . . . . . . Differential locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engaging the differential locks . . Disengaging the differential locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Good visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlamp cleaning system . . . . . Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . Windscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . . Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermatic (automatic air conditioning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching Thermatic on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the temperature . . . . . . . Adjusting air distribution manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
170 170 170 173 174 175 176 176 176 179 179 181 182 184 184 186 187 187 187
Adjusting the airflow manually . . . Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air-recirculation mode . . . . . . . . . Residual heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Economy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activating/deactivating the cooling function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear-compartment air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary heating/ventilation* . . . . . Before switching on . . . . . . . . . . . Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heater booster system* . . . . . . . . . . Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Water separator* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open-air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sliding sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabriolet soft top . . . . . . . . . . . . . Draught stop* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tonneau cover* . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
188 188 189 190 191 191 192 193 193 194 195 196 196 197 198 198 200 201 204 206
Driving systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . Ultrasound reversing aid* . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stowage compartments . . . . . . . . Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ashtray and cigarette lighter . . . . Floormats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telephone* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mobile phone* version with code 852 or code 854 (telephone bracket* with spiral cable) . . . . . . Mobile phone* version with code 386 or code 388 (telephone bracket* without spiral cable) . . . Mercedes-Benz telematic services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Garage door opener* . . . . . . . . . . Sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering wheel heating* . . . . . . .
208 208 213 218 221 221 224 225 228 228 229 233 236 240 242 243
Contents
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The first 1,500 km . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Petrol (EN 228) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diesel (EN 590) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bleeding the fuel system . . . . . . . Vegetable oil methyl ester (V.O.M.E. fuels)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil level in the automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windscreen washer system, headlamp cleaning system . . . . . Tyres and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interchanging wheels . . . . . . . . . .
245 246 247 248 249 251 251 252 252 254 258 258 259 261 262 263 264
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Driving and parking . . . . . . . . . . . 265 After a cold start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Pulling away on a slippery surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Free-wheeling with the engine switched off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Overrun cut-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Driving in wet conditions . . . . . . . 267 Tyre grip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Driving in winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Off-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Symmetrical dipped-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Coupling a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Active Service System . . . . . . . . . 283 Clearing the service indicator . . . 284 Missing the service due date . . . . 284 Calling up the service due date . . 285 Resetting the service indicator . . 285 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Caring for the exterior of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Practical advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . 296 Soft top switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Lamps in the switches and buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Lamps in the instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Display messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Symbol message . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Contents
Where will I find...? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning triangle, first-aid kit and vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fire extinguisher* . . . . . . . . . . . . CD changer* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening/closing in an emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unlocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . Changing the batteries . . . . . . . . Fuel filler flap emergency release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sliding sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabriolet soft top . . . . . . . . . . . . . Releasing the parking lock manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . Changing the front bulbs . . . . . . . Changing the rear bulbs . . . . . . .
340 340 345 345 346 348 348 349 352 353 354 356 357 357 357 358 358 363
Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flat tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing a wheel and fitting the spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnecting the battery . . . . . . Removing the battery . . . . . . . . . Charging and installing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the battery . . . . . . . . Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . Transporting the vehicle . . . . . . . Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing in the event of various malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
366 366 366 367 367 372 374 375 375 376 377 377 379 380 380 381 381 381 381 383
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts . . . . . Vehicle electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tampering with the engine electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Retrofitting electrical or electronic equipment . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle identification plates . . . . . . . Trailer tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation dimensions . . . . . . . . Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tyres and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed index for tyres . . . . . . . . . . Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Long-wheelbase station wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Short-wheelbase station wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabriolet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
387 388 390 390 390 392 394 394 395 396 396 397 397 398 400 401 401 402 403
Contents
Trailer loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service products and capacities . . . . Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windscreen washer system . . . . . Frequencies for garage door openers* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
404 405 405 408 409 411 411 412
Technical terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Introduction
The aim of this manual The aim of this manual
This Owner's Manual is intended to assist you in all situations with your vehicle. Each section has its own colour code to help you find the information you require quickly. At a glance Here you will find an overview of all the controls you can operate from the driver's seat. Getting started Here you will find all the information you will need when you are driving your vehicle for the first time. You should read this section first if this is your first Mercedes-Benz or you have hired the vehicle. Safety This section describes all the safety features of the vehicle. Controls in detail This is where you will find more detailed information about the equipment in your vehicle. This section expands on the "Getting started" section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle, you will find this section particularly interesting. Practical advice Here you will find practical help for possible problems. Technical data All the important technical data for your vehicle is listed here. Operation Here you will find all the information you will need when you are driving your vehicle.
Introduction
The aim of this manual
Contents and index The glossary explains the most important technical terms. The table of contents and the index are intended to help you find information quickly. The following are part of the documentation for your vehicle:
$ $ $ $
This Owner's Manual The brief instructions The "Services" booklet The "Service Centres" booklet
You will receive additional supplementary instructions, depending on the vehicle's equipment.
10
Introduction
Symbols Symbols
You will find the following symbols used in this Owner's Manual: * This asterisk identifies an item of optional equipment for all models. The equipment in your vehicle may differ from some of the descriptions and illustrations you see here as not all models have the same standard equipment. Warning Environmental note

This symbol means that you have to do something. A number of these symbols one after the other indicates a sequence of actions. This continuation symbol indicates an interrupted sequence of actions that will be continued on the next page. This symbol indicates the page on which you will find further information on the subject. This symbol in the glossary of technical terms means that the term following the arrow is also explained. Messages in the multi-function display are printed in this font.
An environmental note gives you tips on the protection of the environment.
!
A note draws your attention to possible hazards to your vehicle.
55
i
A tip contains advice or further information you may find useful.
page
A warning draws your attention to possible risks to your health or life.
->
DISPLAY
11
Introduction
Protection of the environment
Environmental note
Therefore, observe the following points: Operating conditions:

$ $ $ $ $ $
Style of driving:
$ $ $
DaimlerChrysler's declared policy is one of integrated environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources which form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner which takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account. You can also contribute to environmental protection by operating your vehicle in an environmentally-responsible manner. Fuel consumption and engine, transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on the following two factors:
$ $
Avoid driving short distances, as they increase fuel consumption. Make sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. Do not carry any unnecessary weight. Keep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption. Remove roof racks once you no longer need them. A regularly serviced vehicle contributes to environmental protection. For this reason, keep to the service intervals. Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the engine. Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle stationary. Anticipate road and traffic conditions and maintain sufficient distance from the vehicle in front. Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration. Change gear in good time and use each gear only up to 2/3 of its maximum engine speed. Switch off the engine in stationary traffic.
$ $
Returning used vehicles If you wish to return your Mercedes-Benz to have it disposed of in an environmentallyresponsible manner, you can contact Mercedes-Benz on the following telephone numbers: Germany: 00800 1 777 7777 International: +49 69 95 30 72 77
Your vehicle's operating conditions Your style of driving
You can influence both these factors.
12
Introduction
Operating safety Operating safety
Risk of accident
Risk of accident
Risk of accident
Work incorrectly carried out on electronic equipment and its software could stop this equipment working. The electronic systems are connected via interfaces. Tampering with these electronics systems may even cause malfunctions in systems which have not been modified. Such malfunctions could therefore jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle, which could put your own safety at considerable risk. Other work on or modifications to the vehicle carried out incorrectly may jeopardise the vehicle's operating safety.
Some safety systems only operate when the engine is running. Therefore, do not switch off the engine while driving. Always have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
A heavy impact to the underbody, the tyres or the wheels can lead to damage to your vehicle, for example, when driving the vehicle off-road or over an obstacle at high speed. This also applies to vehicles with underbody protection. If this occurs, have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
13
Introduction
Operating safety
Correct use Observe the following information when using your vehicle:
$ $ $ $
Risk of injury
The safety notes in this manual The "Technical data" section in this manual National road traffic regulations National road traffic licensing regulations
There are various warning stickers affixed to your vehicle. Their purpose is to make you and others aware of various risks. You should not, therefore, remove any of these warning stickers unless expressly instructed to do so by information on the sticker itself. If you remove these warning stickers, you or others may not then be aware of risks and may be injured as a result.
14
At a glance
Cockpit Instrument cluster Multi-function steering wheel Centre console Overhead control panel Door control panel
15
At a glance
Cockpit
P68.10-2828-31
16
At a glance
Cockpit
Function 1 Multi-function steering wheel 2 Horn 3 Opens the bonnet 4 Adjusts the steering wheel 5 Adjusts the headlamp range 6 Light switch 7 Adjusts the exterior mirrors 8 Combination switch:
$ $ $
Page 20, 130 252 29 119 40, 115 30 41 41 40, 121
Function 9 Cleans the headlamps a Cruise control lever:

$ $
Page 176 208 213 18, 126
Cruise control Speedtronic
b Instrument cluster c Linguatronic* lever see separate Operating Instructions d Ignition lock e Glove compartment
35 221
Turn signals Windscreen wipers Main-beam headlamps
17
At a glance
Instrument cluster
P54.30-6734-31 English (miles): P54.30-6735-31
18
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Function 1 Reset button 2 L Turn signal indicator lamp, left 3 Indicator and warning lamps v ABS, ESP, 4-ETS warning lamp ? Engine diagnostic indicator lamp (vehicles with a petrol engine) Indicator lamp for cruise control with Speedtronic A Main-beam headlamps indicator lamp q Preglow indicator lamp (vehicles with a diesel engine)
Page 126 41
Function 4 K Turn signal indicator lamp, right 5 Fuel gauge with: Reserve fuel warning lamp
Page 41
Function Automatic transmission selector lever/ shift range Malfunction memory Outside temperature or digital road speed display Speedtronic display Clock 7 Speedometer 8 Rev counter with: 3 Brake system warning lamp - ABS indicator lamp
Page 165
313 312 313 129 129 171
137 143, 134 336 142 127 312 309
307 314
1 Restraint system warning lamp < Seat belt warning lamp 6 Multi-function display with: Trip meter Total distance recorder Transfer case display
215
40, 121 38
19
At a glance
Multi-function steering wheel
Function 1 Multi-function display Controlling the operating system P46.10-2319-31 2 Selecting a submenu or adjusting the volume Back/decreases the volume Forwards/increases the volume 3 Using the telephone* Accepts a call Ends a call
Page 130 130
Function 4 Jumping from one menu to another Forwards Back 5 Scrolling within the menu j Forwards k Back
20
At a glance
Centre console Centre console
Upper section Function 1 Front left seat heating* 2 Rear window wiper 3 Deactivates ESP 4 Engages the differential locks 5 Locks the vehicle centrally 6 Primes and deactivates tow-away protection* Primes and deactivates the interior motion sensor* 7 Front right seat heating* Page 94 43 74 174 91 77 78 94 Function 8 Switches the hazard warning lamps on/off 9 COMAND* or audio system see separate Operating Instructions a Ashtray with cigarette lighter b Thermatic (automatic air conditioning) c AIRBAG OFF warning lamp 226 182 66, 304 Page 121
P68.20-2628-31
21
At a glance
Centre console
Lower section
Function 1 Stowage tray Water separator* indicator lamp (not shown here) 2 Automatic transmission selector lever 3 Auxiliary heating/ ventilation*
Page 197 165 193 196 170 36
P68.20-2629-31
4 Heater booster system* 5 Engages the transfer case 6 Parking brake
22
At a glance
Overhead control panel Overhead control panel
Function 1 Initiates a TeleAid* emergency call 2 Switches the luggage compartment lighting on/off 3 Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off P82.00-2169-31 4 Opens/closes:
$ $
Page 239 124 122
Function 5 Rear-view mirror 6 Transmitter buttons for the garage door opener* 7 Indicator lamp for the garage door opener* 8 Controls the interior lighting 9 Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off
Page 30, 179 240 240 122 122
Sliding sunroof* Cabriolet soft top
200 201
23
At a glance
Door control panel
Function 1 Opens/closes the front and rear side windows 2 Adjusts the front seat 3 Opens door from the inside 4 Stores the seat, mirror and steering wheel settings
Page 198 27 85 102
P72.10-2593-31
24
Getting started
Opening Adjusting Driving Parking and locking
25
Getting started
Opening
The "Getting started" section contains brief details of the basic functions of the vehicle. Read this section particularly thoroughly if this is your first Mercedes-Benz vehicle. If you are already familiar with the basic functions described here, the "Controls in detail" section will help you with more detailed information. The appropriate page references are at the end of each segment. Opening

Press the unlocking button on the key. The turn signal lamps flash briefly. The driver's door and fuel filler flap are unlocked.
Open the door, get into the vehicle and insert the key in the ignition lock.
P80.35-2098-31
You will find further information in the "Controls in detail" section (5 page 82).
Key with remote control
1 Locking button 2 Unlocking button
26
Getting started
Adjusting Adjusting
Seats Risk of accident
Observe the following points: Remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. The seats can be adjusted when the key is removed from the ignition lock or a door is open. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle.

$ $ $ $
Position the backrest almost vertically. Your arms should be slightly bent when you are holding the steering wheel. The distance from the pedals should be such that you can depress them fully. The head restraint should support the back of your head at about eye level.
Only adjust the seats when the vehicle is stationary. You could otherwise lose control of the vehicle as a result of an unexpected seat movement.
Risk of injury
Failing to observe these notes could result in injury. Seat positions which do not allow you to wear your seat belt correctly are a safety hazard and must therefore be avoided.
Switch on the ignition. Turn the ignition 55 to position 2 (5 page 35).
Make sure that nobody can be trapped as the seat is adjusted. Your seat must be adjusted in such a way that you can wear the seat belt correctly (5 page 31).
27
Getting started
Adjusting
The seat adjustment switch is on the door. Seat height

Seat angle

Slide the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 1. Make sure that you have sufficient head clearance.
Slide the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 3 to adjust to a position in which your thighs are lightly supported.
P54.25-2768-31
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
!
When moving the seat, make sure that there is nothing in the footwell and behind the seats, and that the cup holder* (5 page 224) is folded down. You could otherwise damage the seat or the cup holder*.

Backrest angle

1 Seat height 2 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment 3 Seat angle 4 Backrest angle 5 Head restraint height
Slide the switch forwards or backwards in the direction of arrow 4 to adjust to a position in which you can hold the steering wheel comfortably with your arms slightly bent.
i
You can adjust the seats with the front door open up to approximately 30 minutes after the ignition has been switched off.
Slide the switch backwards or forwards in the direction of arrow 2 until you can depress the pedals comfortably.
28
Getting started
Adjusting
Head restraint height

Steering wheel Risk of accident
Slide the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 5.
The lever for adjusting the steering wheel is on the left of the steering column.
Head restraint angle

Adjust the angle of the head restraint by hand. Pull or push.
Only adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is stationary. You could otherwise lose control of the vehicle as a result of an unexpected steering wheel movement. The steering wheel can be adjusted when the key is removed from the ignition and a door is open. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle.
P46.15-2086-31
Risk of injury
Make sure that the back of your head is supported in the middle of the head restraint at eye level. This reduces the risk of injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situations.
1 Steering column fore-and-aft adjustment 2 Steering column height
You will find further information about the seats in the "Controls in detail" section (5 page 93).
Steering column fore-and-aft adjust You can adjust the steering wheel with the front door open up to approx- ment imately 30 minutes after the ignition Push the lever forwards or backwards has been switched off. in the direction of arrow 1 to adjust to a position in which you can hold the Make sure that the ignition is switched steering wheel comfortably with your on or the driver's door is open. arms slightly bent.
29
Getting started
Adjusting
Steering column height

Exterior mirrors Risk of accident
Press the lever up or down in the direction of arrow 2. Make sure that you can move your legs freely and that you can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly.
Make sure that the ignition is switched on. Press button 2 for the left-hand exterior mirror or button 3 for the righthand exterior mirror. Press button 1 at the top or bottom to the right or left until you have adjusted the exterior mirrors to the correct position.
i
In vehicles with the memory function (5 page 102), you can store the steering wheel position together with the position of the seats and the exterior mirrors. Mirrors Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors in such a way that you can get a good overview of road and traffic conditions. Rear-view mirror

The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the image. The objects are actually closer than they appear.
The buttons are located on the left-hand side of the dashboard.
You will find further information about adjusting the mirrors in the "Controls in detail" section (5 page 176).
P88.70-2174-31
Adjust the rear-view mirror manually.
1 Adjustment button 2 Left-hand exterior mirror 3 Right-hand exterior mirror
30
Getting started
Driving Driving
Risk of accident Wearing seat belts Risk of injury
Do not keep any objects in the driver's footwell. If you are using floormats or carpets in the driver's footwell, make sure that:
$ $
there is sufficient clearance for the pedals they are safely secured
Objects could otherwise get caught between the pedals if you accelerate or brake suddenly. You will then not be able to brake, operate the clutch pedal or accelerate properly. This could lead to accident or injury.
If you do not wear your seat belt correctly, or if you do not engage your seat belt in the buckle correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. Under certain circumstances, you may even be severely or fatally injured. For this reason, make sure that all occupants in particular, pregnant women wear their seat belt correctly at all times (5 page 31).
$
The lap belt must be routed across your pelvic area as low down as possible, i.e. over your hip joints and not across your stomach or abdomen. If necessary, pull the belt strap down slightly and retighten in the roll-up direction.
$
Do not route the belt strap over sharp or fragile objects, particularly if these are on or in your clothing, e.g. spectacles, pens, keys, etc. The belt strap could be damaged and you could be injured. Only one person may use each seat belt at any one time. On no account should children travel sitting on the lap of another occupant as the child cannot be properly restrained in the event of an accident, sharp braking or sudden change in direction and the child or other occupants could be seriously or fatally injured.
The seat belt must pass closely over your body and must not be twisted. You should therefore avoid wearing bulky clothing (e.g. winter coats). The shoulder section of the belt must pass over the middle of your shoulder never around your neck or under your arm and be pulled so as to fit snugly against the body.
31
Getting started
Driving
Persons less than 1.50 m tall cannot wear a seat belt correctly. They therefore require special suitable restraint systems. Children less than 1.50 m tall and under twelve years of age cannot wear their seat belt correctly. Always secure these children in a suitable child restraint system installed on a suitable seat in the vehicle (5 page 61). Observe the installation instructions of the child restraint system manufacturer. Do not secure any objects with a seat belt if it is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants.
Risk of injury
Risk of injury
The seat belt can only provide its intended degree of protection if the backrest is almost vertical and the occupant is therefore sitting upright. Avoid seat positions that do not allow the seat belt to be routed correctly (5 page 31). For this reason, position the backrest as close to the vertical as possible. Never drive with the backrest reclined too far back.
By design, airbags are not activated in all types of accidents since a correctly fastened seat belt already provides sufficient protection in many cases. Airbags do not replace seat belts in any way. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injury, make sure that all occupants in particular, pregnant women always wear their seat belts correctly, have adopted a normal sitting position and that the backrests are almost vertical.
32
Getting started
Driving

Pull the belt smoothly from belt reel. Route the belt over the shoulder. Click belt tongue 1 into buckle 2. Pull up on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across the lap, if necessary. If necessary, adjust the belt to the correct height (5 page 34). Risk of injury
You could be injured in an accident if you use seat belts which:

$ $ $
are damaged have been subjected to a load in an accident have been modified
P91.10-2420-31

The seat belts will no longer function or provide their intended degree of protection. Do not route the belt strap over sharp edges as it could tear.
1 Belt tongue 2 Buckle 3 Release button
Make sure that the seat belt is not caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. It could be damaged.
33
Getting started
Driving
Belt height adjustment You can adjust the seat belt height for the following seats:
$ $ $
Check the seat belts for damage regularly. You should never modify the seat belts yourself. They might no longer function correctly. Always have seat belts that are damaged or have been subjected to a load in an accident replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Raising the belt

Push the belt sash guide up. The belt sash guide engages in five different positions.
Driver's seat Front-passenger seat Outer rear seats
Lowering the belt

Adjust the belt height so that the shoulder belt is routed over the middle of your shoulder.
Press and hold release button 1. Move the belt sash guide to the required height. Let go of release button 1 and ensure that the height adjustment mechanism is engaged at a detent.
P91.40-2395-31
Please observe the information about the correct way to wear the seat belt (5 page 31).
1 Release button
34
Getting started
Driving
Ignition lock Risk of injury
G
P82.00-2170-31
The key can only be removed when:

$ $ $
Remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. The seats and the steering wheel can be adjusted when the key is out of the ignition and the door is open. For this reason, do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, as they could become trapped when the seat or steering wheel is adjusted.
it is turned to position 0 in the ignition lock the selector lever of an automatic transmission is moved to position P the brake pedal is not depressed.
Ignition lock
Risk of accident
0 To remove the key 1 Power supply for some consumers, e.g. the seat adjustment function 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position 3 To start the engine (5 page 37)
To unlock the steering wheel, turn the steering wheel slightly as you turn the key to position 1.
Only remove the key from the ignition lock when the vehicle is stationary. You cannot steer the vehicle with the key removed.
35
Getting started
Driving
Automatic transmission You will find further information about the automatic transmission in the "Controls in detail" section (5 page 81). Parking brake
Risk of accident
Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, as they could release the parking brake. This could lead to an accident and could cause injury or fatalities.
P27.00-2107-31
Applying the parking brake P42.20-2116-31

Pull lever 1 firmly upwards. The 3 brake system warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up if the ignition is switched on.
Parking brake Automatic transmission gearshift pattern
P R N D
Park position with selector lever lock Reverse gear Neutral Driving position
1 Lever 2 Release knob
36
Getting started
Driving
Releasing the parking brake

Starting the engine Risk of poisoning
Pull lever 1 upwards slightly, press release knob 2 and guide lever 1 down fully. The vehicle can move immediately. The 3 brake system warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
i
A warning signal sounds if you pull away with the parking brake applied.
Never run the engine in enclosed spaces. Exhaust fumes contain poisonous carbon monoxide. Inhaling exhaust fumes constitutes a health hazard. It can lead to loss of consciousness and death.
If you depress the brake while you are starting the engine, the pedal travel will be longer than usual and the pedal resistance low. If you depress the brake after starting the engine, the pedal travel and resistance return to normal.
!
Do not depress the accelerator pedal during the starting procedure.
37
Getting started
Driving
Starting the petrol engine

Starting the diesel engine

Apply the parking brake. Shift the selector lever to P or N.
Apply the parking brake. Shift the selector lever to P or N.
As soon as the q preglow indicator lamp has gone out, turn the key to position 3 and release it. The engine starts automatically. If after a given time the engine has not started, the starting procedure is terminated automatically. You can terminate the starting procedure manually at any time.
!

!

Turn the ignition to position 3 in the ignition lock (5 page 35) and release the key. The engine starts automatically.
Turn the ignition to position 2 (5 page 35). The q preglow indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. The starting procedure is terminated.
i
If the engine is warm, you can start it without preglow.
38
Getting started
Driving
Pulling away

Depress the brake pedal. The selector lever lock will be released. Risk of accident Shift the selector lever to D or R.
!
Only select reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you will damage the transmission.

i
Wait for the shift process to complete before pulling away.

Do not shift down until the road speed is in the permissible range for the gear required. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.
i
The vehicle will lock itself centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also switch off the automatic locking function (5 page 91).
Release the parking brake. The 3 brake system warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Release the brake pedal. Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
You will find further information about the automatic transmission in the "Controls in detail" section (5 page 164).
Upshifts are made at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly.
39
Getting started
Driving
Switching on the headlamps Dipped-beam headlamps The switch is located between the steering wheel and the driver's door.

Make sure that the ignition is switched on. Turn the light switch to B. The headlamps are switched on.
Main-beam headlamps
i
On some country-specific vehicle models, the dipped-beam headlamps come on when you switch on the ignition.
P54.25-2771-31
P54.25-2770-31
Combination switch
1 Main-beam headlamps 2 Headlamp flasher

Light switch

Press the combination switch forwards to 1. The main-beam headlamps are switched on. The A indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
1 Headlamps off 2 Dipped-beam headlamps on
40
Getting started
Driving
Turn signals

Make sure that the ignition is switched on. Press the combination switch upwards 1 or downwards 2 until it engages. The corresponding turn signal indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. The combination switch returns to its initial position automatically if the steering wheel is turned sufficiently.
Windscreen wipers The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column.
P54.25-2844-31
P54.25-2845-31
Combination switch
i
Press the switch briefly to signal a minor change in direction. The respective turn signal flashes three times.
Combination switch
1 Right-hand turn signal 2 Left-hand turn signal
1 Single wipe 2 To switch on the windscreen wipers
41
Getting started
Driving
Switching on the windscreen wipers

i
If the vehicle is stationary, the windscreen wipers automatically return to intermittent wipe. If you open a door, the intermittent wipe stops. This protects people entering and leaving the vehicle from being splashed. Intermittent wipe continues when you:
$ $ $
Single wipe

Make sure that the ignition is switched on. Turn the combination switch to the correct setting depending on the intensity of the rain. 0 Windscreen wipers off I Intermittent wipe (interval depends on how heavy the rain is)
Briefly press the switch to the pressure point in the direction of arrow 1. The windscreen wipers wipe once without windscreen washer fluid.
Wiping using windscreen washer fluid

Press the switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow 1. The windscreen wiper wipes with washer fluid while the switch is being pressed.
II Normal wipe III Rapid wipe (reverts to normal wipe with the vehicle stationary)
close the doors again turn the combination switch to position II or III move the selector lever to D or R
42
Getting started
Driving
i
You should also use washer fluid when wiping the windscreen in the rain. This prevents smears on the windscreen.
Rear window wiper The switch is located on the upper section of the centre console.
Switching on intermittent wipe

Make sure that the ignition is switched on. Press upper section 1 of the switch. Indicator lamp 2 lights up.
i
You can use position I as a universal setting. The correct wiping frequency is selected according to the intensity of the rain. You will find further information about the combination switch in the "Controls in detail" section (5 page 121). P54.25-2772-31

Switching off intermittent wipe Press upper section 1 of the switch again. Indicator lamp 2 goes out. 1 Intermittent wipe 2 Indicator lamp 3 Windscreen washer system Wiping using windscreen washer fluid

Press and hold lower section 3 of the switch. When you release the switch, the rear window will continue to be wiped for about another five seconds.
i
The rear window wiper comes on automatically if the windscreen wipers are switched on and you engage reverse gear.
You will find further information about the windscreen wipers in the "Controls in detail" section (5 page 179).
43
Getting started
Parking and locking
You have now completed your first journey. You have stopped your vehicle and have parked properly. End your journey as follows: Risk of accident

Apply the parking brake (5 page 36). Move the selector lever to P. Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock (5 page 35) and remove it. The immobiliser is activated.

Turn the steering wheel until the steering wheel lock engages. Press the release button on the seat belt (5 page 33).
Risk of injury
Only remove the key from the ignition lock when the vehicle is stationary. You cannot steer the vehicle with the key removed. Make sure that the transfer case is not in position N. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could release the parking brake. This could lead to an accident and could cause injury or fatalities.
!
Whenever you stop the vehicle, always remove the key to prevent the battery from discharging.
Make sure that nobody can be trapped as you close the doors.

i
On steep slopes, turn the front wheels towards the kerb.
Press the locking button on the key (5 page 26). The turn signal lamps flash briefly three times. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. The vehicle is locked.
You will find further information about locking the vehicle in the "Controls in detail" section (5 page 82).
44
Safety
Restraint systems Driving safety systems Anti-theft systems
45
Safety
Restraint systems
This section will familiarise you with the most important features of the restraint systems in your vehicle. In the event of an accident, your vehicle may collide with another object, e.g. another vehicle. This may result in rapid acceleration or deceleration of your vehicle. During this acceleration or deceleration, the vehicle occupants will be moved towards the force acting on the vehicle. There is therefore the risk of vehicle occupants injuring themselves on the vehicle interior or on parts of the vehicle. The purpose of supplemental restraint systems is to minimise this risk of injury. However, seat belts and airbags are generally unable to prevent injuries caused by objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. The most important restraint systems are:
$ $
Seat belts Restraint systems for children in the vehicle
Risk of injury
If necessary, the following also provide additional protection:

$
SRS system (Supplemental Restraint System) consisting of:

$ $ $
Belt tensioners Belt force limiters Airbags
An airbag increases the degree of protection for vehicle occupants wearing a seat belt and therefore supplements the seat belt. Airbags in no way replace the requirement for all vehicle occupants to wear their seat belt correctly at all times. This is because, on the one hand, an airbag is not deployed in all types of accident, as in some situations it would not provide any additional protection to that already provided by a correctly fastened seat belt.
Roll-over bar
46
Safety
Restraint systems
Seat belts The most important restraint systems are the seat belts and restraint systems for children in the vehicle. In the event of a collision, these reduce the movement of the vehicle occupants in the direction of the impact and therefore reduce the risk of them hitting parts of the vehicle interior. In many countries, there are regulations concerning the use of seat belts and child restraint systems. Risk of injury
On the other hand, airbag deployment only provides increased protection if the seat belt is worn correctly because:
$
the belt helps to hold the vehicle occupant in the best position in relation to the airbag it can significantly reduce the movement of the vehicle occupant towards the force of the impact, e.g. in the event of a head-on collision, and therefore reduce the risk of injury
For this reason, make sure that all vehicle occupants in particular, pregnant women wear their seat belt correctly at all times. Only then can all the restraint systems provide the best possible protection. Make sure that the belt:
$
is routed across your pelvis as low down as possible, i. e. across your hip joints and not across your abdomen fits closely is not twisted is routed across the middle of your shoulder is not routed across your neck or under your arm is pulled tight across the hip joints by pulling the shoulder section of the belt up
$ $ $ $ $
Risk of injury
In accidents in which an airbag is activated, the airbag can only provide additional protection to that already provided by the seat belt if the seat belt is worn correctly.
If you do not wear your seat belt correctly, or if you do not engage your seat belt in the buckle correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. Under certain circumstances, you may even be severely or fatally injured.
47
Safety
Restraint systems
Only one person may use each seat belt at any one time. Never use a seat belt to secure objects if it is already being used by one of the vehicle occupants. Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. winter coats. Do not route the belt strap over sharp or fragile objects, particularly if these are on or in your clothing, e.g. spectacles, pens or keys. The belt strap could tear and you or other vehicle occupants could be injured.
On no account should children travel sitting on the lap of another occupant. The child cannot then be properly restrained in the event of an accident, sharp braking or sudden change in direction and the child or the other vehicle occupants could be seriously or fatally injured. Persons less than 1.50 m tall or children under twelve years of age cannot wear their seat belt properly. They therefore require additional restraint systems fitted on suitable seats in the vehicle for protection in the event of an accident. Always follow the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
Risk of injury
The seat belt can only provide its intended degree of protection if the backrest is positioned almost vertically and the occupant is therefore sitting upright. Avoid seat positions that do not allow the seat belt to be routed correctly. For this reason, position the backrest as close to the vertical as possible. Never drive with the backrest reclined too far back.
48
Safety
Restraint systems
Risk of injury
The seat belt cannot function correctly if the belt strap or the belt buckle is dirty or damaged. You must therefore keep the belt strap and buckle clean, otherwise the belt tongue cannot engage correctly. Regularly check that the seat belts:
$ $ $
Have seat belts which have been damaged or subjected to heavy loads in an accident replaced. Their anchorages should also be checked. Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for safety reasons, you only use seat belts that have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
The airbags or belt tensioners could, for example, be activated inadvertently or could fail in accidents in which the deceleration force is sufficient to trigger the airbag. For this reason, you should never modify the restraint systems.
are not damaged are not routed over sharp edges are not twisted
Risk of injury
Risk of injury
The belt strap could otherwise tear and you or others could be injured.
Modifications to or work incorrectly carried out on a restraint system (seat belts and their anchorages, belt tensioners, belt force limiters or airbags) or its wiring could prevent the restraint system from functioning correctly.
By design, airbags are not activated in all types of accidents since a correctly fastened seat belt already provides sufficient protection in many cases. Airbags do not replace seat belts in any way. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injury, make sure that all vehicle occupants in particular, pregnant women always have their seat belt fastened correctly, have adopted a normal sitting position and that the backrests are almost vertical.
49
Safety
Restraint systems
Fastening a lap-shoulder seat belt

Pull the belt smoothly from belt reel. Route the belt over the shoulder. Engage belt tongue 1 in buckle 2. Pull up on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across the lap if necessary. If necessary, adjust the belt to the correct height (5 page 34).
Fastening the rear centre lap-shoulder seat belt
P91.10-2420-31
P91.14-2002-31
Releasing the lap-shoulder seat belt

Press release button 3 on belt buckle 2.
1 Belt tongue 2 Buckle 3 Release button
1 Belt tongue retainer 2 Buckle for fixed belt tongue 3 Release button for fixed belt tongue 4 Fixed belt tongue 5 Buckle for free belt tongue 6 Release button for free belt tongue 7 Free belt tongue
50
Safety
Restraint systems

Pull the belt tongues out of retainer 1. Pull the belt smoothly from the belt reel. Click fixed belt tongue 4 into buckle 2. Route the belt over the body using free belt tongue 7. Click the free belt tongue into buckle 5. Pull up on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across the lap if necessary.
Releasing the rear centre lap-shoulder seat belt

SRS The SRS system (Supplemental Restraint System) consists of:

$ $ $
Press release button 6 on belt buckle 5. Press release button 3 on belt buckle 2.
Restraint system warning lamp Belt tensioners Belt force limiters Airbag system with:
$ $
Stowing the rear centre lap-shoulder seat belt

Let the belt roll up to the stop. Guide both belt tongues into retainer 1 on top of each other.
Airbag control unit Airbag
51
Safety
Restraint systems
Restraint system warning lamp The 1 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up:
$
Risk of injury
Activation of the belt tensioners, belt force limiters and airbags In the event of a collision, the sensor in the airbag control unit evaluates important physical data, such as duration, direction and degree of vehicle deceleration or acceleration. Based on the evaluation of this data and depending on the vehicle's rate of longitudinal deceleration in a collision, the belt tensioners are the first to be triggered by the airbag control unit. The front airbags are not triggered until a second activation threshold is reached, i.e. an even higher rate of vehicle deceleration in the longitudinal direction is exceeded.
for approximately four seconds when you turn the ignition to position 1 This indicates that the restraint systems are operational.
continuously when you turn the ignition to position 2 This indicates that the 1 restraint system warning lamp is operational.
The SRS system performs regular selfchecks while the engine is running. This means that faults can be detected in good time.
There is a fault if the 1 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when you switch on the ignition, does not go out a few seconds after the engine is running or lights up again. Some systems may be activated inadvertently or not at all in the event of a collision. If this occurs, have the SRS system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
52
Safety
Restraint systems
The belt tensioners and airbags are only triggered if the seat belt is fastened. On $ the initial rate of deceleration or acceleration the front-passenger side, the airbag is only triggered if the front-passenger $ the duration and direction of the decelseat occupation recognition system deeration or acceleration tects that the front-passenger seat is occupied or the seat belt tongue is en- $ the distribution of the force during a collision gaged in the buckle. $ the collision angle The activation thresholds for the belt ten$ the deformation characteristics of the sioners and airbags are variable and are vehicle adapted to the rate of vehicle deceleration. This process is pre-emptive in nature as $ the characteristics of the object with airbag deployment must take place during which the vehicle collides, e.g. the oththe collision and not after it has happened. er vehicle Factors which can only be seen and measured after the collision has taken place cannot be taken into account when triggering the airbag and are not decisive for this.
Airbag deployment depends on various factors, such as:
If necessary, they can be used to help reconstruct the sequence of events in an accident. These factors include:
$ $ $
the speed of the vehicle at the time of the collision injuries to the vehicle occupants vehicle deformation
The vehicle may be considerably deformed without an airbag being triggered, e.g. if only relatively easily-deformable vehicle parts are affected by the collision and the required deceleration threshold is not reached. On the other hand, airbags may be triggered even though the vehicle only displays minor deformation, if, for example, rigid vehicle parts such as a longitudinal member are affected by the collision thus causing vehicle deceleration to exceed the pre-determined threshold.
53
Safety
Restraint systems
Belt tensioners and belt force limiters The front seat belts and the outer rear seat belts are fitted with belt tensioners and belt force limiters.
Risk of injury
i
Belt tensioners do not correct:
$ $
Airbags are not triggered in all types of accident. They are controlled by complex sensor technology and evaluation logic. This process is pre-emptive in nature as airbag deployment must take place during the impact and must be adapted to provide calculated, additional protection for the vehicle occupants. Not all airbags must be triggered in the event of an accident. The different airbag systems operate independently of each other. However, each system is dependent on the type of accident (head-on, side, rear-end impact or overturning) and severity of the accident (mainly vehicle deceleration or acceleration) determined during the initial phase of the accident.
incorrect sitting positions incorrectly worn seat belts
!
Do not place any heavy objects on the front-passenger seat and do not insert the belt tongue on the front passenger seat belt into the buckle if the frontpassenger seat is not occupied. The belt tensioner and the airbags on the front-passenger side could otherwise be triggered in the event of an accident. In the event of a collision, the belt tensioners tighten the seat belts, pulling them close against the body.
Belt tensioners do not pull occupants back towards the seat backrest. Triggered belt force limiters reduce the load exerted by the seat belt on the occupants. When the ignition is switched on, the belt tensioners and belt force limiters function:
$
if the restraint systems are operational (the 1 restraint system warning lamp lights up after the ignition is switched on) (5 page 35).
54
Safety
Restraint systems
$
for the driver's and front-passenger lap-shoulder seat belts and for the left and right lap-shoulder seat belts in the rear if they are engaged in the belt buckle in the event of a head-on or rear-end collision, if the vehicle has a high rate of acceleration or deceleration in a longitudinal direction in the initial stages of the collision on the front-passenger side, if the front-passenger seat is occupied in vehicles on vehicles with front-passenger seat occupancy recognition*
i
An indication that a belt tensioner in the rear has been triggered is that the buckle is pulled down and is almost flush with the top of the seat.
Risk of injury
Risk of injury
The rear belt tensioners only function if they can pull the belt buckles down without hindrance. This action must not be impeded in any way, therefore: Do not grasp the buckles Do not place any objects underneath the buckles This could otherwise adversely affect operation of the belt tensioner or render it completely ineffective. You would then have no additional protection.
If the belt tensioners have been triggered, have them replaced at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the safety regulations when disposing of belt tensioners. Any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can provide details of these regulations.
If the belt tensioners are triggered, you will hear a bang, which is not hazardous to your hearing, and some dust may be released. The 1 restraint system warning lamp lights up.
55
Safety
Restraint systems
Airbag system Risk of injury Risk of injury
$ $ $
Do not lean on the doors from inside the vehicle. Do not put your feet on the dashboard. Only hold the steering wheel by the rim. This allows the airbag to inflate fully. If you hold the steering wheel by the inside, you could be injured if the airbag is triggered. Do not place any objects on the airbags or between the airbags and the vehicle's occupants. Do not hang any hard objects, such as coat hangers, on the grab handles. Do not place any objects between the backrest and the door.
The service life of the front-passenger airbag is limited to 15 years. Have the frontpassenger airbag replaced after no more than 15 years at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Airbags offer an additional degree of protection, but do not replace the seat belts in any way. You are therefore only sufficiently protected if you wear your seat belt correctly at all times. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injury by an airbag inflating in an accident, please observe the following points:
$
All vehicle occupants in particular, pregnant women must wear their seat belt correctly at all times. Choose a seat position as far back from the airbag as possible and which still allows you to drive the vehicle safely. Do not lean forwards while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. over the padded boss of the steering wheel.
$ $
The risk of skin abrasions or minor injuries caused by an airbag cannot be completely ruled out due to the high speed at which the airbag is required to inflate.
56
Safety
Restraint systems
Risk of injury
Risk of injury
Correct operation of the airbags can only be guaranteed if:

$ $
you do not place any objects under the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat you do not cover the padded boss of the steering wheel, the front-passenger airbag cover or the areas of the roof lining accommodating the windowbags, and you do not stick any badges or stickers on them you do not carry out any modifications to the restraint systems, including their wiring
To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injury in the event of an accident with a high rate of deceleration, e.g. due to an airbag inflating within milliseconds, or in the event of sudden braking, please observe the following:
$
Vehicle occupants must wear their seat belt correctly at all times and sit back against the backrest which should be almost vertical. The head restraint should support the back of your head at about eye level. Rearward-facing child seats must not be secured on the front-passenger seat if the front-passenger front airbag is not deactivated or cannot be deactivated. In Mercedes-Benz vehicles with automatic child seat recognition, the front-passenger airbag is deactivated if a child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition is fitted to the front-passenger seat and the AIRBAG OFF warning lamp is lit. If your vehicle does not have automatic child seat recognition, children must be secured in a child restraint system on a suitable seat in the rear. If you fit a forward-facing child seat on the front-passenger seat, you must move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position.
All vehicle occupants must select a seat position in which they can wear their seat belt correctly and which is as far back from the airbag as possible. The driver's seat position must allow him to drive the vehicle safely. The driver's arms should be slightly bent when holding the steering wheel. The driver must maintain the correct distance from the pedals such that he or she can depress them fully. Position the front-passenger seat as far back as possible, particularly if a child is sitting on this seat or is secured in a child restraint system on this seat.
57
Safety
Restraint systems
Airbag deployment The airbag inflates within milliseconds. The 1 restraint system warning lamp lights up. Risk of injury
After the airbags have been triggered:
$ $
If you sell your vehicle, you are obliged to make the buyer aware of these points. You should therefore pass on this Owner's Manual to the new owner for this purpose. Observe the safety regulations when disposing of airbag units. Any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can provide details of these regulations.
i
If the airbags are triggered, you will hear a bang and some dust may be released. This bang is not harmful to your hearing and the dust does not constitute a health hazard. The inflated airbag slows and restricts movement of the vehicle occupants. If a vehicle occupant makes contact with an airbag which has been deployed, the airbag will release some hot gas. This feature is designed to reduce the force acting on the occupant's head and chest. The airbag is therefore depressurised after the accident.
Airbag parts are hot. Do not touch them as you could burn yourself You must have the airbags replaced at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop
Your vehicle is fitted with the following airbags:

$ $ $
Driver's front airbag, located in the steering wheel Front-passenger front airbag above the glove compartment Windowbags above the side windows
58
Safety
Restraint systems
Front airbags The front airbags are designed to increase protection to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger. The driver's front airbag and the front-passenger front airbag are triggered:
$
Risk of injury
When an airbag inflates, a small amount of fine powder is released. This powder does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. The powder could cause short-term breathing difficulties for persons suffering from asthma or other respiratory conditions. To prevent these breathing difficulties, you should either leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so or open the windows to let fresh air in.
The driver's front airbag is located in the steering wheel; the front-passenger front airbag is located above the glove compartment.
in the initial stages of an accident with a high rate of acceleration or deceleration acting on the front of the vehicle if it is predicted that additional protection would be provided if the seat belt is fastened if the vehicle overturns, never, unless the system detects high vehicle deceleration in a longitudinal direction
P54.30-2471-31
$ $ $
1 Driver's airbag 2 Front-passenger airbag The driver's front airbag inflates in front of the steering wheel; the front-passenger front airbag inflates in front of and above the glove compartment.
59
Safety
Restraint systems
Front-passenger airbag 2 will only be triggered if:
$
Windowbags
The windowbags are triggered:

$ $
the front-passenger seat is occupied the AIRBAG OFF warning lamp on the centre console is not lit (5 page 21). This means that a child seat with automatic child seat recognition has not been fitted or has been incorrectly fitted
in the event of a side impact on the side of the impact if the impact exceeds a predetermined force independently of the driver's and frontpassenger airbags
and
$
P91.60-2772-31
The windowbags will not be triggered in the event of a minor side impact. 1 Windowbags (arrows)
!
Do not place any heavy objects on the front-passenger seat. The belt tensioner and the airbags on the front-passenger side could otherwise be triggered in the event of an accident and would then have to be replaced.
60
Safety
Restraint systems
Children in the vehicle If children are travelling in the vehicle:
$
Risk of injury
Child restraint systems Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use the child restraint systems listed on (5 page 63). Risk of injury
secure each child using a child restraint system which is appropriate to his/her age and size, and which has been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles, preferably on a suitable rear seat make sure that the children are strapped in throughout the journey
Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. The children could:
$ $
injure themselves on parts of the vehicle press the central locking button, thereby releasing the child-proof locks, and then open the doors. They could injure themselves or others, or they could get out of the vehicle and injure themselves or be injured by passing vehicles be seriously or fatally injured due to long periods of exposure to high temperatures
To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries to children in the event of an accident, sharp braking or sudden change in direction:
$
You can obtain child seats and information about the correct child restraint system from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
always secure children less than 1.50 m tall or under twelve years of age in a special child restraint system fitted on a suitable seat in the vehicle, as they cannot wear the seat belts properly
61
Safety
Restraint systems
do not secure children under twelve years old on the front-passenger seat unless the child is secured in a child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition or a forward-facing child seat and the front-passenger seat is in its rearmost position children must never travel sitting on the lap of another occupant. Children cannot be restrained in the event of an accident, sharp braking or sudden change of direction due to the forces which act. They would be thrown against parts of the vehicle interior and could be seriously or fatally injured all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belt correctly at all times
Risk of injury
Follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when fitting a child restraint system. It is advisable to fit the child restraint system to one of the rear seats. The child is generally better protected there.
62
Safety
Restraint systems
Suitable child seats Weight categories and ages Group 0: up to 10 kg up to approximately 9 months Group I: 9 to 18 kg approximately 8 months to 4 years Group II/III: 15 to 36 kg approximately 3 to 12 years
1 Only use child seats with automatic child seat recognition. 2 Move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position when using child seats without automatic child seat recognition.
Child seat on the front-passenger seat As recommended1 Universal2 Universal2 "Universal" child seats can be recognised by their orange-coloured approval label. The label is affixed to the child seat and identifies the type of child seat.
Child seat on the left and right-hand seat of the rear bench seat Universal Universal Universal
P91.00-2139-31 aus Ba. 209
Example of a child seat label
63
Safety
Restraint systems
Recommended child restraint systems Weight categories and ages Manufacturer Type Group 0: up to 10 kg Britax-Rmer up to approximately 9 months Group I: 9 to 18 kg approximately 8 months to 4 years Britax-Rmer Britax-Rmer Baby Safe Prince Duo Zoom Rucky Approval number E1 03 301063 E1 03 301095 E1 03 301133 E1 03 301061 E1 03 301107 DaimlerChrysler order number B6 6 86 8169 B6 6 86 8167 B6 6 86 8168 B6 6 86 8205 B6 6 86 8166 B6 6 86 8176 B6 6 86 8180 Automatic child seat recognition Yes No1 Yes Yes No1 Yes No1
Group II/III: 15 to 36 kg Britax-Rmer approximately 3 to 12 years Bingo GmbH

1 Move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position when using child seats without automatic child seat recognition.
64
Safety
Restraint systems
Risk of injury
Risk of injury
Risk of injury
Use only child restraint systems with automatic child seat recognition that have been recommended for Mercedes-Benz vehicles on the front-passenger seat. Information about this can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. If you use a rearward-facing child seat on the front-passenger seat, this must be a special Mercedes-Benz rearward-facing child seat with automatic child seat recognition. If you use any other type of rearward-facing child seat on the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger airbag is not deactivated and the child could be seriously or fatally injured if the airbag deploys. In order to warn against this danger, there is an appropriate warning symbol on the dashboard.
If you use a forward-facing child seat without automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat, you must move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. They may not be able to save themselves if danger threatens, e.g. due to heat exposure. They could injure themselves on moving parts in the vehicle, e.g. the seats, or open the doors, thereby endangering themselves and others.
An incorrectly installed child seat may work loose in the event of an accident, sharp braking or sudden change in direction and the child and other vehicle occupants could be seriously or fatally injured. Therefore, you should never place objects, e.g. a cushion, under the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always be in contact with the seat cushion of the vehicle seat. On the rear bench seat, you should only use child restraint systems with the ISOFIX child seat securing system* which have been recommended for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
65
Safety
Restraint systems
Activating the child seat lock

Automatic child seat recognition The sensor system for the front-passenger seat automatically detects whether a special Mercedes-Benz child seat with a transponder has been fitted. If this is the case, the AIRBAG OFF warning lamp lights up on the centre console.
Insert the belt tongue in the seat belt buckle. Extend the belt fully and allow the inertia reel to draw it back in. The child seat lock is activated.
P00.0-3185-31
Releasing the child seat lock

Warning symbol for the rearward-facing child seat

After removing the child seat, roll up the belt fully. The child seat lock is released. P68.10-2738-31
Child seat lock With the exception of the driver's seat belt and the rear centre seat belt, all seat belts are fitted with a child seat lock. The child seat lock ensures that the belt does not loosen once the child seat has been secured.
AIRBAG OFF warning lamp
The front-passenger airbag is then deactivated.
66
Safety
Restraint systems
ISOFIX child seat securing system* ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for special child seats in the rear of the vehicle. The securing rings for two child seats are located on the left and right of the rear seats between the seat cushion and the backrest. Risk of injury
Risk of injury
If the AIRBAG OFF warning lamp does not light up when the child seat is fitted, the front-passenger airbag is not deactivated. The child could be seriously injured if the front-passenger front airbag inflates. In this case, proceed as follows:
$ $
Do not use a rearward-facing child seat on the front-passenger seat. Fit the rearward-facing child seat to a suitable rear seat. Use a forward-facing child seat on the front-passenger seat. To do this, you must move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position.
Have the automatic child seat recognition checked at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a MercedesBenz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
i
The driver's airbag and the belt tensioners remain active, even if the frontpassenger airbag is deactivated.
or
$
A child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX child seat securing system does not provide sufficient protection for children weighing more than 22 kg. You should therefore only secure children weighing up to 22 kg in a child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX child seat securing system. If the child weighs more that 22 kg, you should secure the child restraint system using a lap-shoulder seat belt.
67
Safety
Restraint systems
Risk of injury
Risk of injury
An incorrectly fitted child seat may work loose and seriously or fatally injure the child or other vehicle occupants. After installing the child seat, make sure that it is engaged in the securing rings on the left and right.
Risk of injury
If the child restraint system or its securing system, e.g. the ISOFIX child seat securing system, has been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident, the child secured there could be seriously or fatally injured in the event of an accident, sharp braking or sudden change in direction. For this reason, have child restraint systems and their securing systems that have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident checked and, if necessary, replaced immediately at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.
In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
P91.20-2120-31
Also follow the child seat manufacturer's installation instructions when fitting the child seat.
Securing rings
68
Safety
Restraint systems
Fitting a child seat to the rear bench seat The lashing eyelets are in the luggage compartment under the rear bench seat.

When you fit the child seat to the left or right-hand seat of the rear bench seat, route the securing strap between the supports of the respective head restraint.
Risk of injury
Only use the lashing eyelet in the corresponding position for each child seat. Other lashing eyelets could tear in an accident and the child could be seriously injured. Make sure that:
$
P91.40-2497-31
P91.40-2354-31
the straps do not cross over and that they are not twisted the hook is attached and engaged correctly
1 Left-hand lashing eyelet 2 Centre lashing eyelet 3 Right-hand lashing eyelet

4 Hook

Remove the safety net* (5 page 108). Remove the luggage compartment cover (5 page 112).
Attach hook 4 into the corresponding lashing eyelet.
69
Safety
Restraint systems
Child-proof locks If children are travelling with you in the vehicle, you can activate special locks for the rear compartment. Child-proof locks on the rear doors You can use the child-proof locks on the rear doors to secure each door individually. If a door has been secured:
$ $
Risk of accident
G
P72.12-2347-31
Activate the child-proof locks for the rear doors and deactivate the rear window controls when children are travelling in the vehicle. The children could otherwise open the doors or windows while the vehicle is in motion, thereby endangering themselves or others. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could open a front door from the inside, thereby endangering themselves and others.
you will not be able to open it from the inside you will only be able to open it from the outside if the vehicle is unlocked (door locking knobs are raised)
1 Child-proof lock on 2 Child-proof lock off Activating the child-proof locks

Slide the locking latch upwards 1 using a suitable object.
Deactivating the child-proof locks

Slide the locking latch downwards 2 using a suitable object.
70
Safety
Driving safety systems Driving safety systems
In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems:
$ $ $ $
Risk of accident
ABS ABS controls the brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when braked. This means that the steerability of your vehicle is maintained when you brake. ABS works from a speed of approximately 8 km/h upwards, regardless of road surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even if you only brake gently. Risk of accident
ABS (anti-lock braking system) BAS (Brake Assist) 4-ETS (Electronic Traction System) ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
The risk of an accident increases if you:

$ $ $
drive too fast, particularly when cornering drive on a wet and slippery road surface drive too close to the vehicle in front
i
In wintry conditions, the optimum effect of ABS, BAS, 4-ETS and ESP can only be achieved when you use M+S tyres, and snow chains when necessary.
ABS, BAS, 4-ETS and ESP cannot reduce this risk nor override the laws of physics. You should always therefore adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a sufficiently safe distance from other road users and objects on the road.
Do not depress the brake pedal repeatedly in quick succession (pumping). Depress the brake pedal firmly and evenly. Pumping the brake pedal reduces braking efficiency.
The - indicator lamp in the instrument cluster (5 page 19) lights up briefly when you start the engine. This indicates that ABS is operational.
71
Safety
Driving safety systems
Braking If ABS cuts in while you are braking, you will feel the brake pedal pulsate. When ABS intervenes:

BAS Brake Assist supports ABS by boosting the braking force in an emergency braking situation. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force and thus shortens the stopping distance.
4-ETS 4-ETS makes it possible to pull away or accelerate on a slippery surface. It brakes the wheels individually before they spin. 4-ETS remains active when you deactivate ESP. 4-ETS comes into effect if at least one tyre reaches its tyre grip limit. The system brakes individual wheels until sufficient traction is available once more. 4-ETS is no longer active once a road speed of approximately 60 km/h is exceeded. The v warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up briefly when you start the engine. This indicates that 4-ETS is operational. It flashes at any speed if even one tyre has exceeded its tyre grip limit.
Continue to depress the brake pedal firmly until the braking situation is over. Depress the brake pedal with maximum force.
For full braking:

i
Continue to depress the brake pedal firmly, even at maximum deceleration.
i
If ABS has malfunctioned, BAS, ESP and 4-ETS will also be deactivated. The normal driving and braking functions are still available to you.
72
Safety
Driving safety systems !
The engine must not be running if:
$ $
Risk of accident
ESP the vehicle is being towed with a raised axle the parking brake is being tested using a dynamometer ESP brakes individual wheels and limits engine torque. In this way, it tries to prevent the vehicle from oversteering or understeering. The v warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes when ESP is active. The ESP system improves handling stability and traction in all driving situations. ESP only functions properly if wheels with the recommended tyre sizes are used (5 page 398). The v warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up briefly when you start the engine. This indicates that ESP is operational.
If the v ABS, ESP, 4-ETS warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes, proceed as follows:
$ $ $ $
do not deactivate ESP only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away accelerate less when driving adapt your driving style to suit road and traffic conditions
Application of the brakes via 4-ETS may otherwise destroy the braking system.
Otherwise, the vehicle could begin to skid. If you drive too fast, 4-ETS cannot reduce the risk of an accident.
73
Safety
Driving safety systems !
The engine must not be running if:
$ $
Risk of accident
Deactivating ESP the vehicle is being towed with a raised axle the parking brake is being tested using a dynamometer It may be best to deactivate ESP in the following situations:
$ $ $ $
If the v ABS, ESP, 4-ETS warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes, proceed as follows:
$ $ $ $
If snow chains are being used In deep snow On sand or gravel On rough terrain the engine torque is no longer limited
do not switch off ESP only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away accelerate less when driving adapt your driving style to suit road and traffic conditions
Application of the brakes by ESP may otherwise destroy the braking system.
When you deactivate ESP:

$
Otherwise, the vehicle could begin to skid. If you drive too fast, ESP cannot reduce the risk of an accident.
ABS, BAS and ESP are automatically de- $ the drive wheels could spin slightly activated if the differential locks are enYou will therefore achieve a cutting acgaged. tion for better traction. 4-ETS remains active.
74
Safety
Driving safety systems
The switch is located on the centre console. ESP will intervene in the following situations, despite having been deactivated:
$ $
Risk of accident
When you are braking At speeds of up to about 60 km/h when a wheel reaches its tyre grip limit, e.g. when one side of the road is icy The wheel is then braked in order to increase overall traction.
ESP is deactivated if the ABS, ESP, 4-ETS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. You should therefore always adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions.
P54.25-2773-31
Press the upper section of the switch. The v warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
The v warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes at any speed if the tyres on your vehicle have reached their tyre grip limit.
Activating ESP

Press the lower section of the switch. The v warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. You are returned to normal driving.
75
Safety
Anti-theft systems
Immobiliser The immobiliser prevents unauthorised persons from starting your vehicle. Activating

Anti-theft alarm system* A visual and audible alarm is triggered when the alarm system is primed, if:
$ $ $ $ $ $
Priming the anti-theft alarm system The indicator lamp is on the centre console.
a door is opened the tailgate is opened the bonnet is opened the vehicle's position is changed a window is broken the vehicle is unlocked with the key 1 Indicator lamp

Remove the key from the ignition lock.
Deactivating

P54.25-2774-31
Switch on the ignition.
Lock the vehicle using the remote control. The anti-theft alarm system is primed after approximately 15 seconds. Indicator lamp 1 flashes.
76
Safety
Anti-theft systems
Deactivating the anti-theft alarm sys tem

Tow-away protection* Visual and audible alarms are triggered if the vehicle tilt changes when tow-away protection is primed.
The switch is located on the centre console.
Open the vehicle using the key. The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated. If you do not then open a door or the tailgate, the anti-theft alarm system will be reactivated automatically after about 40 seconds.
i
The tow-away protection alarm is triggered if, for example, the vehicle is jacked up on one side. Priming tow-away protection When you lock the vehicle, tow-away protection is automatically primed after approximately 30 seconds. Tow-away protection is automatically deactivated when you unlock the vehicle. 1 To deactivate tow-away protection 2 Indicator lamp 3 To deactivate the interior motion sensor* P54.25-2775-31
Disabling the alarm There are two ways of disabling the alarm:

Press the or button on the key. Insert the key into the ignition lock.
or

77
Safety
Anti-theft systems
Deactivating tow-away protection Deactivate tow-away protection if the vehicle is to be carried on another vehicle. This will prevent false alarms.

Move the key to position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock. Lock the vehicle using the key.
i
Do not leave anything (e.g. a mascot) hanging on the rear-view mirror as it could trigger a false alarm. Do not leave anything on the armrest on the centre console as this could impair the operation of the interior motion sensor.
Move the key to position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock (5 page 35). Press switch 1 within 30 seconds. Indicator lamp 2 lights up briefly. Tow-away protection is deactivated. To deactivate the interior motion sensor* as well, hold down the switch until the indicator lamp goes out.
Tow-away protection remains deactivated until the vehicle is locked again. Interior motion sensor* An audible and visual alarm is triggered if the vehicle is locked and:
$ $
someone breaks a side window of your vehicle someone reaches into the vehicle interior
78
Safety
Anti-theft systems
Activating the interior motion sensor The switch is located on the centre console.

Close the side windows (5 page 198). Close the sliding sunroof* (5 page 200). Lock the vehicle using the remote control. The interior motion sensor is primed after approximately 40 seconds.

Move the key to position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock. Press switch 3. Indicator lamp 2 flashes briefly. To deactivate the tow-away protection* as well, hold down the switch until the indicator lamp goes out.
P54.25-2775-31 Deactivating the interior motion sensor Deactivate the interior motion sensor if people or animals are to remain in the locked car. This will prevent false alarms. 1 To deactivate tow-away protection* 2 Indicator lamp 3 To deactivate the interior motion sensor
i
The interior motion sensor remains deactivated until you lock the vehicle again.
79
80
Controls in detail
Opening and closing Seats Storing settings Loading Lighting Instrument cluster Operating system Automatic transmission Transfer case Differential locks Good visibility Thermatic (automatic air conditioning) Auxiliary heating/ventilation* Heater booster system* Water separator* Open-air Driving systems Features
81
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
You will find detailed information about your vehicle's functions in the "Controls in detail" section. Read this section in particular if you are already familiar with the vehicle's basic functions. If you are not yet familiar with the basic functions, the "Getting started" section will provide you with more information. You will find the reference to the appropriate part of that section at the start of each segment. Key with remote control The vehicle's equipment includes two remote control keys. An emergency key element is inserted into each key. The emergency key element release slides 4 have different colours to help distinguish between the two keys. The remote control allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle from some distance. To prevent theft, only use the remote control in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. When set to the factory settings, the remote control locks and unlocks the following centrally:
$ $ $
Risk of accident
Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could open a locked door from the inside or start the engine using a key left in the vehicle, thereby endangering themselves and others. You should therefore never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle and always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle.
The doors The rear door or tailgate (Cabriolet) The fuel filler flap
82
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
i
The vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked using the radio remote control if there is a key in the ignition lock. The driver's door can also be unlocked manually in an emergency (5 page 348). Unlocking
Key with remote control
If you do not open any doors after the vehicle has been unlocked, the vehicle locks again automatically after about 40 seconds. Locking the vehicle centrally

P80.35-2099-31
Press the button once. The turn signals flash three times. The doors, the fuel filler flap and the rear door are locked. The anti-theft alarm system* is primed.
1 Battery check lamp 2 Locking button 3 Unlocking button 4 Release slide 5 Emergency key element (mechanical)
Unlocking centrally

Press the button once. The turn signals flash once. All the doors, the fuel filler flap and the rear door are unlocked. The anti-theft alarm system* is deactivated.
!
Do not expose the key to high levels of electromagnetic radiation. Doing so may cause the radio remote control to function incorrectly.
83
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
Individual settings If you frequently travel alone, you may wish to change the function of the remote control. Pressing the button once will then unlock the doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap centrally.

Unlocking centrally

Restoring the factory settings

Press the button twice. The turn signals flash once. The locking knobs in the doors pop up. The antitheft alarm system* is deactivated.
Press the and buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice.
Press the and buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice.
Locking the vehicle centrally

Checking the batteries

Press the button once. The turn signals flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. The anti-theft alarm system* is primed.
Press the or button. The remote control batteries are in good condition if the battery check lamp lights up briefly.
The remote control will then function as follows: Unlocking the driver's door

Press the button once. The turn signals flash once. The locking knob in the driver's door pops up. The anti-theft alarm system* is deactivated.
84
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
Summer opening/convenience closing feature Risk of injury Opening the side windows

Opening a door from the inside You can also open a locked front door from the inside at any time.
Press and hold the button when unlocking the vehicle until the side windows are opened to the required position.
i
You can only open a locked rear door from the inside if it is not protected by the child-proof locks.
Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close a side window. If danger threatens, release the switch and open the side window. Remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time.
Closing the side windows

Press and hold the button when locking the vehicle until the side windows are closed.
i
For safety reasons, you can only open and close the side windows in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. P72.10-2452-31
i
Point the key at the infra-red sensor below the door handle on the driver's door to open and close the vehicle.
1 Locking knob 2 Door handle
55
85
Controls in detail
Opening and closing

Pull door handle 2. Locking knob 1 pops up if the door was locked. The door is unlocked and can be opened. Risk of accident
G
P72.12-2480-31
Opening the rear door Opening from the outside Risk of injury
The rear lights may be concealed when the spare wheel bracket is folded out to the side. You should then protect the vehicle by using a warning lamp or warning triangle. Do not drive with the spare wheel bracket folded out to the side. You could otherwise injure others or cause an accident by the spare wheel bracket swinging from side to side. Make sure that the spare wheel bracket is always correctly locked in place.
The rear door swings to the side. Take care to allow sufficient clearance.
1 Lock cylinder 2 Door handle

Press the button on the key twice. The vehicle is unlocked centrally. Press lock cylinder 1 and pull door handle 2. Fold the rear door out to the left.
Risk of poisoning
i
Station wagon: the rear door can also be unlocked and opened manually in an emergency (5 page 348).

Make sure that the rear door is always closed when the engine is running. Exhaust fumes could otherwise get into the vehicle interior and poison you.
86
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
Opening from the inside Risk of injury

The rear door swings to the side. Take care to allow sufficient clearance.
Do not drive with the spare wheel bracket folded out to the side. You could otherwise injure others or cause an accident by the spare wheel bracket swinging from side to side. Make sure that the spare wheel bracket is always correctly locked in place.
Pull door handle 2. The rear door is unlocked. Locking knob 1 pops up.
Open the rear door.
i
If the rear door is protected by the childproof locks, it cannot be opened from the inside, even if it is unlocked.
Risk of poisoning
Make sure that the rear door is always closed when the engine is running. Exhaust fumes could otherwise get into the vehicle interior and poison you.
P72.20-2196-31
Risk of accident
G
1 Locking knob 2 Door handle
The rear lights may be concealed when the spare wheel bracket is folded out to the side. You should then protect the vehicle by using a warning lamp or warning triangle.
87
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
Closing the rear door Closing from the inside Risk of injury Closing from the outside Risk of injury Locking/unlocking the rear door sepa rately
Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close the rear door.
You can lock the rear door separately, independently of the central locking. After you have closed the rear door:
Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close the rear door.
Risk of injury Risk of injury
G
P72.12-2481-31
Do not leave children alone in the vehicle. They could open the rear door from the inside, even when it is locked, thereby endangering themselves and others.
Do not leave children alone in the vehicle. They could open the rear door from the inside, even when it is locked, thereby endangering themselves and others.
i
Do not leave the key in the boot. You could otherwise lock yourself out.
1 Locked 2 Unlocked
i
Do not leave the key in the boot. You could otherwise lock yourself out.
88
Controls in detail
Opening and closing

Press the button on the key twice. The vehicle is unlocked centrally. Remove the emergency key element from the key (5 page 348). Insert the emergency key element into the rear door lock. Turn the emergency key element fully clockwise as far as position 1. The rear door remains locked even if the vehicle is unlocked centrally again.
i
When the vehicle has been locked centrally: the anti-theft alarm system* is triggered if you unlock the rear door using the emergency key element and open it. To disable the alarm:

Risk of poisoning

Press the or button on the key. Switch on the ignition.
The rear lights may be concealed when the spare wheel bracket is folded out to the side. Other road users may then fail to notice you and could crash into your vehicle. You should provide additional protection for the vehicle by using a warning lamp or warning triangle. Do not drive with the spare wheel bracket folded out to the side. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. Make sure that the spare wheel bracket is correctly locked in place.
or

i
You will only be able to unlock the rear door using the emergency key element if it was previously locked separately using the emergency key element (5 page 348).
Opening the tailgate (Cabriolet) Risk of injury
!
The tailgate swings downwards and out. Make sure therefore that there is sufficient clearance below the tailgate. 55
Make sure that the tailgate is always closed when the engine is running. Exhaust fumes could otherwise get into the vehicle interior and poison you.
89
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
You can only open the tailgate if it is un Fold spare wheel bracket 3 out to the locked. side.
Lift securing hook 1 and pull lever 2 in the direction of the arrow.

Turn quick-release locks 4 anti-clockwise. Open zip fasteners 5 upwards approximately 10 cm.
P72.10-2453-31
P72.20-2197-31
P72.20-2198-31
1 Securing hook 2 Lever 3 Spare wheel bracket

4 Quick-release locks 5 Zip fasteners
6 Handle

Press the button on the remote control twice. The vehicle is unlocked centrally.
Pull handle 6 upwards and fold down the tailgate.
90
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
i
You must only undo the quick-release locks if the Cabriolet soft top is open and the tonneau cover* is secured. Closing the tailgate (Cabriolet) Risk of injury
Automatic locking The vehicle will lock itself once you have pulled away. You can open a door from the inside at any time, even if it is locked. The vehicle unlocks centrally when a front door is opened from the inside.
You can switch off the automatic locking function using the operating system (5 page 150). Locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can lock or unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside using the central locking switch. This feature may be useful if, for example, you wish to unlock the frontpassenger door from the inside or lock the vehicle before you pull away. Risk of accident
Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close the tailgate.
i
The doors unlock automatically in an accident if the force of the impact exceeds a predetermined level. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels turn. This means that you could become locked out:
$ $
Risk of injury
Do not leave children alone in the vehicle. They could open the tailgate from the inside, even if it is locked, thereby endangering themselves and others.
when the vehicle is being pushed when the vehicle is on a dynamometer
Do not leave children alone in the vehicle. They could open a door from the inside, even when it is locked, thereby endangering themselves and others.
91
Controls in detail
Opening and closing
i
You can open a door from the inside at any time, even if it is locked. You can only open a locked rear door from the inside if it is not protected by the childproof locks (5 page 70). If you have previously locked the vehicle from the outside with the remote control, you cannot unlock it centrally from the inside. You can only lock the vehicle centrally if all the doors are closed.
The switch is located on the centre console.
Locking

Press upper section 1 of the central locking switch. If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks centrally.
P54.25-2777-31
Unlocking

Press lower section 2 of the central locking switch. All the doors unlock if you have not previously locked the vehicle with the radio remote control.
1 To lock 2 To unlock
92
Controls in detail
Seats Seats
You will find information about adjusting the seats in the "Getting started" section (5 page 27). Multi-contour seat* The contour of the backrest and the seat cushion length can be adjusted separately to support your back correctly. The switch is located on the side of the seat.

Make sure that the ignition is switched on.
Contour of the backrest in the upper back region

Seat cushion length

Adjust the seat cushion length to the length of your thighs using switch 1.

Adjust the contour of the backrest in the area of the upper back to the required position using switch 3.
Backrest side cushions Contour of the backrest in the lumbar region

Adjust the contour of the backrest in the lumbar region to the required position using switch 2.
Adjust the side cushions using switch 4 so that they give good lateral support.
P91.25-2149-31
1 Seat cushion length 2 Contour of the backrest in the lumbar region 3 Contour of the backrest in the upper back region 4 Backrest side cushions
93
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat heating* The switches for the rear seats are located on the left and right-hand sides next to the rear doors. The switches for the front seats are located on the centre console.

Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (5 page 35).
Switching on

Press switch 1 or 2.
The red indicator lamps in the switch indicate the current heating level. Level 1 Normal heating. One indicator lamp lights up. The seat heating switches off automatically after approximately thirty minutes. 2 Rapid heating. Both indicator lamps light up. The system switches over to level 1 automatically after approximately five minutes. No indicator lamp lights up. The seat heating is switched off.
Switching off

Press switch 1 repeatedly until all indicator lamps go out.
i
The seat heating may switch off automatically if the battery voltage is too low. One or both indicator lamps flash. The seat heating switches back on automatically as soon as a sufficient battery voltage is available again.
P54.25-2780-31
Switches on the centre console
1 Normal heating 2 Rapid heating
94
Controls in detail
Seats
Head restraints Risk of injury Installing and removing the front seat head restraints Removing

Press switch 1 upwards until the head restraint is fully extended. Remove the head restraint upwards.
Only drive with the head restraints fitted. This reduces the risk of injury in the event of an accident. Make sure that occupants only sit on seats with the head restraint fitted.
Installing P54.25-2779-31

Press switch 1 up for approximately five seconds. Insert the head restraint. When doing so make sure the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel.
1 Switch
i
Tilt the backrest backwards slightly to make fitting and removal easier.
Push the head restraint downwards until it engages.
95
Controls in detail
Seats
Resetting the front seat head restraints Resetting the head restraints is necessary following a voltage supply interruption, e.g. if the battery has been disconnected or discharged.

Installing and removing the rear bench seat head restraints Removing

Folding down the front seat backrests (easy-entry function) Short-wheelbase station wagon and Cabriolet The easy-entry function makes it easier for you to get in and out of the rear of the vehicle. Risk of injury
Remove the head restraint upwards.
Front-passenger seat: make sure that the cup holder* on the centre console is folded down (5 page 224). Position the seat fully forward and the head restraint fully down. The head restraint is reset.
Installing

Insert the head restraint. When doing so make sure the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel.

Push the head restraint downwards until it engages. Adjust the height and angle of the head restraint manually so that the back of the head is supported at eye level.
Make sure that nobody can become trapped as the seat is folded forwards or back.
i
The easy-entry function can be cancelled by:

pressing a seat adjustment switch (5 page 28). pressing a memory function position button (5 page 102). operating the lever for adjusting the steering wheel (5 page 29).
96
Controls in detail
Seats
$ $
The seat moves forward or back, depending on its original position Backrest 2 tilts forwards On the driver's side, the steering wheel moves up towards the cockpit
Folding back the backrests

Push the backrest back until it engages. The seat cushion, head restraint, backrest and steering wheel (driver's side) move back to their original position. For safety reasons, the seat moves in a longitudinal direction back to its original position only if this position was in front of the easy-entry position.
P91.10-2421-31

Fold backrest 2 forwards in the direction of the arrow.
1 Seat release lever 2 Backrest Folding the backrests forwards

!
Make sure that you only fold backrest 2 forwards when the easy-entry function is deactivated. You may otherwise damage the centre console or the switches on the multi-contour seat*.
i
Store your seat position using the memory function (5 page 102). If your seat was positioned behind the easy-entry position, you can move it forwards again by pressing the memory 55 button.
Pull or push seat release lever 1 in the direction of the arrow. The easy-entry function is activated:
$
The seat cushion and head restraint move down
97
Controls in detail
Seats
Easy-entry feature The easy-entry feature makes it easier for you to get in and out of the vehicle. The steering wheel moves up towards the cockpit. The easy-entry feature is activated if you have stored a setting for the key (5 page 102) and you:
$
Risk of injury
i
This process can be interrupted by:
$ $
Make sure that the backrest is fully engaged.
operating the lever for adjusting the steering wheel (5 page 29) pressing a memory function position button (5 page 102)
remove the key from the ignition lock open the driver's door when the key is in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock
Risk of injury
P91.00-2156-31
or
$
Make sure that nobody can become trapped when you activate the easy-entry feature. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could open the driver's door from the inside, even if it is locked, and thereby unintentionally activate the easy-entry feature.
Protection against entrapment of the feet
If the key is inserted in the ignition lock when the driver's door is closed, the steering wheel returns to the last position set.
The easy-entry feature can be activated or deactivated using the operating system (5 page 154).
98
Controls in detail
Seats
Rear bench seat Risk of accident Folding down the backrest
The head restraint must support the back of your head at about eye level. Seat positions which do not allow you to wear your seat belt correctly are a safety hazard and must therefore be avoided. Make sure that nobody can become trapped as the seat is adjusted. Make sure that the seat lock clicks audibly into place.
For safety reasons, only adjust the rear bench seat when the vehicle is stationary.
P91.22-2091-31
Risk of injury
The rear bench seat must be adjusted in such a way that the seat belt can be fastened correctly (5 page 31). The back of the body must be against the backrest and the seat belt must be at shoulder height. Only drive with the head restraints fitted. This reduces the risk of injury in the event of an accident.
The rear bench seat is divided asymmetrically. You can move the left-hand and righthand sections separately to enlarge the luggage compartment. The following variations are possible:
$ $
1 Backrest release levers 2 Rear bench seat release lever

Remove the head restraints (5 page 96). Pull release lever 1 and fold the backrest forwards until it engages.
The backrests folded down The rear bench seat folded fully forwards
99
Controls in detail
Seats
Raising the backrest Folding down the rear bench seat

i
Long-wheelbase station wagon: open the rear doors. This will allow you to reach release lever 1 more easily.

Fold down the backrest. Pull release lever 2 and fold the rear bench seat forwards until it engages.
Side-facing rear bench seat* in the luggage compartment Risk of injury
Raising the rear bench seat

Pull release lever 1 and fold up the backrest. Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped. Push the backrest backwards until the seat lock clicks audibly into place. Install the head restraints.
Fold the rear bench seat back until the seat lock clicks audibly into place. Raise the backrest. Install the head restraints.
Make sure that nobody can become trapped as the side-facing bench seat is folded down. The side-facing rear bench seat should only be occupied when the rear bench seat is raised and the seat lock is engaged. The rear bench seat head restraints must be installed.

100
Controls in detail
Seats
Folding down the side-facing rear bench seat Folding up the side-facing rear bench seat

Fold side-facing rear bench seat 2 upwards. Fold in support 1 and press it fully into recess 3 of side-facing rear bench seat 2.
P91.22-2093-31 P91.22-2092-31
4 Wheel housing

1 Support 2 Side-facing rear bench seat 3 Recess

Make sure that support 1 is against wheel housing 4.
Fold out support 1. Fold side-facing rear bench seat 2 downwards.
101
Controls in detail
Storing settings
Using the memory function, you can store three settings on the driver's side per key. On the front-passenger side, you can store one setting per memory button. The buttons are located on the doors. Storing

Set the seats and head restraints, and also the steering wheel and exterior mirror on the driver's side. Press memory button 1 and then release it. Press one of position buttons 2 within three seconds.
Press required position button 2 until adjustment is complete.
i
For safety reasons, the adjustment will stop as soon as you release the position button. You will find information in the "Getting started" section about:
$ $ $

P54.25-2778-31
Calling up the stored positions
seat adjustment on (5 page 27) steering wheel adjustment on (5 page 29) exterior mirror adjustment on (5 page 30)
!
If the seat is reclined, first place the backrest in an upright position before recalling a stored position. You could otherwise damage the seat.
1 Memory button 2 Position buttons

Make sure that the ignition is switched on or the door is open.
102
Controls in detail
Storing settings
Exterior mirror parking position To make it easier to park, you can set the position of the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side in such a way that you can see the rear wheel on the front-passenger side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store one parking position per key for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. Storing

Press button 3. Adjust the mirror so that you can see the rear wheel on the front-passenger side. Press memory button 4 and the lower section of adjustment button 1 within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the mirror does not move.
P88.70-2179-31
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched on. Make sure that the MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING function is activated in the CONVENIENCE submenu (5 page 156).
1 Adjustment button 2 To select the left-hand exterior mirror 3 To select the right-hand exterior mirror 4 Memory button
103
Controls in detail
Loading
Loading guidelines Risk of injury Please observe the following information when loading and transporting goods:
G
P97.00-2005-31
Secure and position loads as described in the loading guidelines. Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by the load in the event of sharp braking, a sudden change of direction, or an accident. Even if you follow all loading guidelines, the load increases the risk of injury in the event of an accident.
Do not allow the load, including passengers, to exceed the gross vehicle weight or the permitted axle loads for the vehicle. Push heavy loads forwards as far as possible. Fill the rear of the luggage compartment with lighter items. Do not stack loads higher than the upper edge of the backrests. Always place the load against the backrests of the front or rear seats.
The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle depend on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should load the vehicle as shown in the illustration.
$ $
Risk of poisoning
Close the rear door when the vehicle is in motion. Exhaust fumes could otherwise enter the vehicle interior and poison you.
104
Controls in detail
Loading
$ $
Whenever possible, transport loads behind seats that are not occupied. As far as is possible, loads should be transported in the luggage compartment with the backrests engaged in an upright position.
Secure any kind of load with sufficient wear and tear-resistant lashing material. Pad sharp edges for protection. P68.00-2962-31
Anchoring loads Long-wheelbase station wagon: There are four lashing eyelets on the sides of the luggage compartment.
Lashing eyelet
P68.00-2984-31
Short-wheelbase station wagon and Cabriolet: There are two lashing eyelets at the sides under the rear bench seat.
Please note the following information for anchoring loads:

$ $
Secure loads to the lashing eyelets. Do not use elastic securing straps or nets. These are only suitable as anti55 slip protection for lighter loads.
If the rear bench seat is not occupied: insert each seat belt cross-wise into the opposite buckle
105
Controls in detail
Loading
$
Do not pass the lashing material across sharp edges or corners. Pad sharp edges for protection. Boot tubs that cover the lashing eyelets must be removed before securing loads. Observe the instructions issued with the lashing material used. If you use tensioning straps, please use only those with a breaking strain of at least 700 kg and a maximum strap width of 25 mm.
$ $ $
Safety net* Risk of injury
If you are transporting light items, use the safety net as described below.
$ $
P68.00-2963-31
The safety net cannot restrain heavier loads. For this reason, you should always tie them down. Otherwise, you could damage items of luggage that have not been adequately secured in the event of an emergency stop or impact.
Pass the tensioning strap cross-wise over the load as illustrated. Spread the load evenly between the lashing eyelets. If using tensioners: do not overload the lashing eyelets.
If the safety net is fitted, the row of seats behind it must not be occupied.
106
Controls in detail
Loading
You can secure the safety net behind the rear bench seat, or behind the front seats when the rear bench seat is folded forwards. Installation position behind the rear bench seat Attaching the safety net at the top
i
Long-wheelbase station wagon: open the rear doors. This will allow you to hook in the safety net more easily. P68.50-2186-31
P68.50-2194-31
P68.50-2185-31
3 Tensioning buckle 4 Strap

Hook safety net 1 into retainer 2 on both sides. Tensioning buckles 3 of straps 4 must point in the direction of travel (arrow).
Fold the rear bench seat forwards (5 page 100) without having folded down the backrest first.
1 Safety net 2 Retainer
107
Controls in detail
Loading
Attaching the safety net at the bottom Tightening the safety net

Removing the safety net

Pull the loose ends of straps 4 to gently tighten safety net 1. Raise the rear bench seat (5 page 100). The safety net is pulled tight by the rear bench seat.
Loosen straps 4.

Move tensioning buckles 3 to the horizontal position.
P68.50-2187-31

Unhook hook 5. Unhook safety net 1 at the top. Roll up safety net 1 and fasten it with the Velcro fasteners from the glove compartment. Place the safety net behind the rear bench seat.
i
5 Hook 6 Lashing eyelet

Check the tension of the safety net after travelling a short distance. Retighten the safety net if necessary.
Adjust straps 4 to the necessary length for lashing eyelets 6 using tensioning buckles 3. Attach hook 5 to lashing eyelets 6.
108
Controls in detail
Loading
Installation position behind the front seats Attaching the safety net at the top Attaching the safety net at the bottom
P68.50-2185-31 P68.50-2188-31
P68.50-2189-31
Fold the rear bench seat forwards (5 page 100).
1 Safety net 2 Retainer
3 Tensioning buckle 4 Strap 5 Hook 6 Lashing eyelet
55
109
Controls in detail
Loading

Hook safety net 1 into retainer 2 on both sides. Tensioning buckles 3 on straps 4 must be visible when viewed in the direction of the luggage compartment.
i
Check the tension of the safety net after travelling a short distance. Retighten the safety net if necessary. You will find information about removing the safety net on (5 page 108). Stowing the safety net

Short-wheelbase station wagon with stowage boxes
Adjust straps 4 to the necessary length for lashing eyelets 6 using tensioning buckles 3. Attach hook 5 to lashing eyelets 6.
P68.50-2190-31
Roll up safety net 1. Fasten using the Velcro fastener from the glove compartment. 1 Safety net 2 Velcro fastener 3 Slots in the stowage box

Tightening the safety net

Pull the loose ends of straps 4 firmly until safety net 1 is sufficiently tightened.
Guide Velcro fastener 2 through slots in the stowage box 3. Secure safety net 1 using Velcro fastener 2.
110
Controls in detail
Loading
Luggage compartment cover Risk of injury Covering the luggage compartment Retracting the blind

G
P68.50-2191-31
Take hold of the blind by the pull strip and remove it from the retainer on both sides. Guide it back slowly.
Make sure that the luggage compartment cover is correctly inserted. It might otherwise come loose and injure you. When the luggage compartment cover is fitted, the side-facing rear bench seat must not be occupied.
Removing the luggage compartment cover
Station wagon The luggage compartment cover comprises two blinds. You can also completely cover the luggage compartment when the rear bench seat is folded forward.
1 Blind to the rear bench seat 2 Blind to the rear door

Extend blind 1. Hook it into the retainers on the rear bench seat. Extend blind 2. Hook it into the retainers on the left and right of the tailgate.
P68.50-2197-31
1 Locking mechanism 2 Luggage compartment cover
55
111
Controls in detail
Loading

Roll the luggage compartment cover up. Push locking mechanisms 1 on the left and right-hand sides of luggage compartment cover 2 towards the centre of the vehicle. Swing out the luggage compartment cover upwards.
Covering and uncovering the luggage compartment
Stowage boxes* in the shortwheelbase station wagon The stowage boxes are located to the rear of the luggage compartment on the left and right-hand sides.
P68.50-2192-31
Short-wheelbase station wagon with stowage boxes The luggage compartment cover is a folding cover. 1 Luggage compartment cover 2 Retainer

P68.00-2964-31
Fold luggage compartment cover 1 over the luggage compartment (arrowed).
Opening

Removing the luggage compartment cover

Fold the cover upwards.
Unhook luggage compartment cover 1 from the left and right-hand sides of retainer 2. Remove luggage compartment cover 1.
112
Controls in detail
Loading
Ski holder* and roof rack* Risk of accident
Trailer tow hitch* Risk of accident
Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions when using roof racks. A roof rack that has not been secured correctly or an incorrectly secured load can become detached. Observe the maximum roof load (5 page 401, 402) when using roof racks.
Roof racks recommended for use on Mercedes-Benz vehicles have been specially developed and tested. These roof racks conform to DIN standard 75302 and are additionally subjected to crash and durability tests.
!
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use roof racks that have been tested and approved for use on MercedesBenz vehicles. These help to prevent vehicle damage. You can obtain more detailed information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
In the event of malfunctions or damage, have the entire trailer tow hitch checked at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
113
Controls in detail
Loading
Trailer with 7-pin connector Attaching an adapter cable

Lift the socket cap. Insert the connector into the socket. Lug 2 on the connector is inserted into groove 1 in the socket. Turn the connector clockwise to the stop. Let the cap of the socket click into place in the plug.
P31.10-2574-31 P31.10-2417-31

1 Coupling ball 2 Socket Care

1 Groove 2 Lug Using an adapter cable, you can also connect 7-pin connectors to the 13-pin socket in the vehicle. You can obtain the adapter cable from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Secure the adapter cable to the trailer with cable ties.
Clean the ball coupling if it is dirty (5 page 289).
i
The ultrasound reversing aid* (5 page 218) is deactivated when the trailer cable or the adapter cable is inserted into the socket.
i
Your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre will also carry out this maintenance work.
114
Controls in detail
Lighting Lighting
You will find information about switching on the lights and using turn signals in the "Getting started" section (5 page 40). Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for safety reasons, you drive with the headlamps switched on even during the daytime. Variations in operation are possible in certain countries as a result of legal requirements and self-imposed obligations. In these countries, the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on at the same time as the ignition. In countries where constant headlamp mode is not a requirement, you can adjust this setting using the operating system (5 page 145).
Light switch
If you are driving in countries where ve- The light switch is on the left of the cockhicles are driven on the opposite side of pit. the road to that in the country in which the vehicle is registered, oncoming traffic could be dazzled by the asymmetric dipped-beam headlamps. Have the headlamps switched over to symmetriP54.25-2781-31 cal dipped beam when driving in these countries. You can obtain information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. M Lights off/constant headlamp mode U Lights controlled automatically C Side lamps, licence plate illumination and instrument lighting B Dipped-beam or main-beam headlamps on Right-hand parking lamp on Left-hand parking lamp on
115
Controls in detail
Lighting
i
A warning sounds if you remove the key from the ignition lock and open the driver's door while the side lamps or dipped-beam headlamps are switched on. The SWITCH OFF LIGHTS! message appears in the multi-function display. Constant headlamp mode You can set constant headlamp mode using the operating system (5 page 145). This does not apply to countries in which there is a legal requirement to use constant headlamp mode.

Automatic headlamp feature The side lamps, dipped-beam headlamps and licence plate illumination are switched on automatically, depending on the ambient light. Risk of accident
If the light switch is set to U:
$
You should only turn the light switch from U to B when it is dark if the vehicle is stationary. You could otherwise cause an accident as a result of the headlamps being briefly interrupted. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. You are responsible for the vehicle's lighting.

the headlamps may switch off briefly as a result of strong glare (e.g. from oncoming traffic) the lights do not switch on automatically in foggy conditions
Turn the light switch to U. The side lamps are switched on and off automatically when the key is in position 1 in the ignition lock (5 page 35). The dipped-beam headlamps, side lamps and licence plate illumination are switched on/off automatically when the engine is running.
Turn the light switch to M. The dipped-beam headlamps, side lamps and licence plate illumination are switched on when the engine is running.
Set the light switch to B in good time. You will otherwise endanger yourself and others.
116
Controls in detail
Lighting
Front foglamps/rear foglamp Switching on the front foglamps

Switching on the rear foglamp

i
When the light switch is set to U, you cannot switch on the front or rear foglamps. To switch on the front foglamps, you must first turn the light switch to B. Risk of accident
Turn the light switch:
$ $
Make sure that the B dipped-beam headlamps are switched on. Pull the light switch to the first stop. The green indicator lamp in the light switch lights up.
Make sure that the B dipped-beam headlamps are switched on. Pull the light switch to the second stop. The yellow indicator lamp in the light switch lights up.
from U to B when it is dark only if the vehicle is stationary to B before driving if you suspect foggy conditions
You could otherwise cause an accident as a result of the headlamps being briefly interrupted.
117
Controls in detail
Lighting
Exterior lighting delayed switch-off The following lights switch on when you stop the engine in darkness:
$ $ $ $
i
You can reactivate this function within ten minutes by opening a door. If none of the doors is opened after the engine is switched off, or an open door is not closed, the exterior lighting goes out after 60 seconds.
Deactivating delayed switch-off tempo rarily

Side lamps Tail lamps Licence plate illumination Front foglamps
After switching off the engine, turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock, then to 2 and then back to 0 (5 page 35). Delayed switch-off is reactivated automatically the next time the engine is started.
When a door is opened and then closed again, the delayed switch-off time set in the operating system (5 page 147) begins to count down. The lights switch off once this delayed switch-off time has elapsed.
You can set or deactivate the delayed switch-off feature using the operating system (5 page 147).
118
Controls in detail
Lighting
Locator lighting If you set the locator lighting to ON in the operating system (5 page 146), the following lights are switched on after the vehicle is unlocked centrally when it is dark:
$ $ $ $
Remote-operated illuminated entry system The lamps in the exterior mirrors come on when the vehicle is unlocked centrally when it is dark. When you open a door, the lamp on the respective side goes out. If no door is opened, the lamps go out:
$ $
Adjusting the headlamp range The thumbwheel for adjusting the headlamp range is to the left of the steering column.
Side lamps Tail lamps Licence plate illumination Front foglamps if you open the driver's door if you switch on the ignition automatically after no more than 40 seconds
when you switch on the ignition after no more than 40 seconds
P54.25-2782-31
The lights are switched off:

$ $
or
$
Thumbwheel
i
Only use the settings described below for the respective vehicle.
119
Controls in detail
Lighting
Long-wheelbase station wagon 0 Front seats occupied, or front seats and rear bench seat occupied 1 Front seats and rear bench seat occupied and load in the luggage compartment to the maximum permitted rear axle load, but not exceeding the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 2 Driver's seat occupied and load in the luggage compartment to the maximum permitted rear axle load, but not exceeding the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight Short-wheelbase station wagon 0 Front seats occupied 1 Front seats and rear bench seat occupied 2 Front seats and rear bench seat occupied and load in the luggage compartment to the maximum permitted rear axle load, but not exceeding the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 3 Driver's seat occupied and load in the luggage compartment to the maximum permitted rear axle load, but not exceeding the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight Cabriolet 0 Front seats occupied 1 Front seats and rear bench seat occupied 2 Front seats and rear bench seat occupied and load in the luggage compartment to the maximum permitted rear axle load, but not exceeding the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 4 Driver's seat occupied and load in the luggage compartment to the maximum permitted rear axle load, but not exceeding the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
120
Controls in detail
Lighting
Combination switch The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column. Switching on the main-beam head lamps

Hazard warning lamps The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off. They switch on automatically when an airbag is triggered. The switch is located on the upper section of the centre console.
Turn the light switch to B or U (5 page 115). Press the combination switch towards 1. The main-beam headlamps come on. The A main-beam indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
P54.25-2783-31
Headlamp flasher

1 Main-beam headlamps 2 Headlamp flasher
Pull the combination switch briefly towards 2. The A main-beam indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up briefly.
P54.25-2784-31
Hazard warning lamps switch
121
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching on the hazard warning lamps

Interior lighting The switches are located on the overhead control panel.
Automatic control Switching on

Press the hazard warning lamps switch. All the turn signal lamps flash.
Switching off the hazard warning lamps

Move rocker switch 3 to the middle position. When it is dark, the interior lighting (except the luggage compartment) switches on automatically if you:
$ $ $
Press the hazard warning lamps switch again. All the turn signal lamps go out. P82.20-2406-31
unlock the vehicle remove the key from the ignition lock open a door
i
If the hazard warning lamps have been switched on automatically, press the hazard warning lamps switch twice.
1 Luggage compartment lighting switch 2 Front right reading lamp switch 3 Rocker switch for automatic control 4 Front left reading lamp switch
The front interior lighting comes on when a front door is opened, the rear interior lighting comes on when a rear door is opened. The entry lamps also switch on.
122
Controls in detail
Lighting
The interior lighting switches off after approximately 30 minutes if a door is left open and if the key is not in the ignition lock. The interior lighting switches off automatically after a delay once the door is closed and if the key is not in the ignition lock. You can set or deactivate the delayed switch-off feature using the operating system (5 page 148). Switching off

Manual control Switching on

Press the symbol on rocker switch 3. The interior lighting also remains switched off when it is dark and you:
$ $ $
Press the symbol on rocker switch 3. The interior lighting remains on even if the doors are closed.
unlock the vehicle remove the key from the ignition lock open a door
Switching off

Move rocker switch 3 to the middle position.
!
The reading lamps do not switch off automatically when they have been switched on manually. Switch off the reading lamps after use so that the battery is not discharged.
123
Controls in detail
Lighting
Rear reading lamps The rear reading lamps are located above the rear bench seat on the right and lefthand sides. Luggage compartment lighting The switch is located on the overhead control panel. P82.20-2407-31
P82.20-2411-31 P82.20-2408-31
Luggage compartment lighting
1 Luggage compartment lighting switch 1 Reading lamp on 2 Reading lamp off 3 Automatic control
124
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching on and off

To switch off:

Press the switch to switch the luggage compartment lighting on and off.
Open the rear door. Press the lock down in the direction of the arrow until it engages. The luggage compartment lighting is switched off.
i
The luggage compartment lighting switches on when the rear door is opened. In this case, you cannot switch off the luggage compartment lighting using the switch. Switching on and off when the rear door is open
P72.12-2231-31
!
1 Lock 2 Lock cylinder Do not close the rear door while the lock is engaged in the down position. You could otherwise damage the lock. To switch on:

!
Switch off the luggage compartment lighting if you wish to leave the rear door open for a long time. This prevents the battery from being discharged.
Press lock cylinder 2. The luggage compartment lighting functions again as normal.
125
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
You will find a complete overview of the instrument cluster in the "At a glance" section (5 page 18). If you open the driver's door and then do nothing further, the display will only light up for approximately 30 seconds. You can change the display in the instrument cluster using the operating system, e.g. the language setting (5 page 129). P54.30-6733-31 Risk of accident Adjusting the instrument lighting You can adjust the brightness of the instrument lighting using the reset button located on the left-hand side of the instrument cluster. If the vehicle's exterior lighting is switched on, the brightness of the buttons on the centre console is also adjusted.
1 Reset button The display in the instrument cluster is activated when you:
$ $ $ $
No messages are displayed if the instrument cluster or the multi-function display has malfunctioned. You may then not recognise dangers and endanger yourself or others. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, and have the instrument cluster or multi-function display checked.
i
The instrument lighting adjusts itself to the brightness of the ambient light.
turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (5 page 35) open the driver's door press reset button 1 switch on the lights (5 page 115)
126
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Brighter

Rev counter The red mark in the rev counter denotes the engine's overrevving range.
Outside temperature display Risk of accident
Turn reset button 1 clockwise. The instrument lighting becomes brighter.
!
Do not drive in the overrevving range. Doing so could damage the engine. The fuel supply is cut off to protect the engine when the red band is reached. Environmental note
Dimmer

Turn reset button 1 anti-clockwise. The instrument lighting becomes dimmer.
Resetting the trip meter

Press reset button 1 in the instrument cluster repeatedly until the trip meter is shown. Press reset button 1 again and keep it pressed until the display is reset.
Even if the temperature displayed is just above freezing point, the road surface may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. Your vehicle could enter a skid if you do not adapt your driving style accordingly. For this reason, always adapt your driving style and speed in accordance with the weather conditions.
Avoid high engine speeds. Your vehicle's fuel consumption will increase unnecessarily and the higher level of pollutant emissions will damage the environment.
When you leave a garage, for example, a lower outside temperature is only displayed after a delay.
127
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
There may also be a short delay before a rise in the outside temperature is displayed. This prevents the wrong temperature, caused by heat radiating from the engine, being displayed when the vehicle is stationary or travelling slowly.
i
You can set the unit for the temperature display using the operating system (5 page 143).
128
Controls in detail
Operating system Operating system
The operating system is activated as soon as the ignition is switched on. You may perform the following using the operating system:
$ $
Multi-function display The multi-function display is in the speedometer. The basic status of the multi-function display shows the trip meter and the total distance recorder in the centre of the speedometer. This is referred to as the standard display. The standard display will also show you if any malfunctions are present.
The basic status of the multi-function display shows the current:

$ $
trip meter value total distance recorded outside temperature time transfer case display selector lever position/shift range
Call up the information about your vehicle Make settings
as well as the:
$ $ $ $
You can use this not only to find out when the next service is due, but also to set the language for messages in the instrument cluster and much more. Risk of accident
P54.30-XXXX-31
If a different display is shown, press the or button repeatedly until the standard display appears.
Only use the operating system when road and traffic conditions permit. You will otherwise be too distracted and could cause an accident as a result.
The operating system shows the information in the multi-function display.
1 Trip meter 2 Total distance recorder 3 Outside temperature 4 Clock 5 Selector lever position/automatic transmission shift range 6 Transfer case display
129
Controls in detail
Operating system
Multi-function steering wheel The multi-function display and the settings in the operating system are controlled using the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. The multi-function display changes when you press one of these buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. The multi-function display can be considered as a menu which contains a number of submenus. Several commands are thematically combined in each of the menus. In the AUDIO menu, for example, you will find functions for operating the radio or the CD player. You can use a function to call up information or to change the settings for your vehicle.
Function 1 Multi-function display Controlling the operating system 2 Selecting a submenu or adjusting the volume Back/decreases the volume Forwards/increases the volume 3 Using the telephone*
P46.10-2319-31
Accepts a call Ends a call 4 Jumping from one menu to another Forwards Back 5 Scrolling within the menu j Forwards k Back
130
Controls in detail
Operating system
The arrangement of the menus and functions within a menu can be imagined as a cycle:
$
If you press the or button enough times, each menu will appear one after the other. If you press the k or j button enough times, all the functions of each menu will appear one after the other.
The SETTINGS... menu contains submenus instead of functions with which you can call up or change a setting. The way in which you control these submenus is described in the "Settings menu" section (5 page 138). The number of menus depends on:
$ $
The menus for vehicles with a COMAND/ COMAND APS system are described on the following pages.
the special equipment in your vehicle whether a COMAND* or Audio 30 system is installed in your vehicle
131
Controls in detail
Operating system
Menus on vehicles with a COMAND system* installed This is what the displays look like when you scroll through the menus. The explanations for the individual menus are shown in the following table.
German P54.30--31 Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6023en-31 Franzsisch: P54.30-6023fr-31 Italienisch: P54.30-6023it-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6023sp-31
132
Controls in detail
Operating system
This is what the menus and their individual functions look like: Menu 1 Standard display Check the engine oil level Functions/submenus Call up ASSYST Menu 2 AUDIO Select a radio station Operate the CD player* Select a TV station* Menu 3 NAVI* Activate route guidance Menu 4 Malfunction memory Call up a malfunction Menu 5 Settings Reset to factory settings Menu 6 Trip computer Consumption statistics after start Menu 7 Telephone* Enter PIN
Instrument clus- Consumption ter submenu statistics since the last reset Lighting submenu Vehicle submenu Heater submenu* Convenience submenu Call up the range
Load the phone book Look for a name in the phone book
Digital speedometer Check the coolant temperature
133
Controls in detail
Operating system
i
The tabular overview of the menus contains generic terms which are not always shown in the operating system. The appropriate generic term should make it easier for you to familiarise yourself with the menus. The operating system displays the new function range with the first menu function. The operating system displays the menus for the Audio 10*, Audio 10 CD* and Audio 30 APS* audio systems in English, regardless of the language selected for the display.
The standard display can also be modified. The digital speedometer can be displayed instead of the outside temperature. You can select this setting in the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu in the DISPLAY VALUES IN function (5 page 145).

Displaying the digital speedometer

Press the k or j button repeatedly until the speedometer appears in the display. The current speed is displayed.
You can select the following functions in the standard display of the menu by pressing the k or j buttons: Page 254 283 134 134
Checking the coolant temperature

Function Check the engine oil level Call up ASSYST Digital speedometer Check the coolant temperature
Press the k or j button repeatedly until the coolant temperature appears in the display.
P54.30-6396-31 Ein Bild fr alle Sprachen.
134
Controls in detail
Operating system
Audio menu You can control the audio equipment which you have just switched on using the functions in the Audio menu. If no audio equipment has been switched on and:
$ $
Selecting a radio station

Switch on the radio. For notes on how to do this, see the separate Operating Instructions.
Press the k or j button repeatedly until you have found the station you require. Depending on the setting for station selection (5 page 149), the radio searches:
$ $
an audio system is installed, the AUDIO OFF message appears in the display a COMAND system* is installed, the AUDIO OFF message appears in the display Page 135 136
Press the or button repeatedly until the station currently selected appears in the display.
for the next stored station (SP) using the station search function
P54.30-6073-31 (DE, EN=IT, FR, SP)
i
You can only store new stations using the radio itself. For notes on how to do this, see the separate operating instructions. You can also operate the radio in the same way as usual.
Function Radio, select station Operate the CD player/CD changer*
1 Station 2 Frequency range 3 Setting for station selection using memory
135
Controls in detail
Operating system
Operating the CD player*

Navigation* menu In the NAVI menu, you can set the navigation system route guidance to be shown in the display.

$ $
Switch on the radio and select the CD player. For notes on how to do this, see the separate operating instructions.
If the navigation system is switched on, the NAVI ACTIVE message is displayed. When route guidance is activated, you will see a display such as that shown below:
Press the or button repeatedly until the settings for the CD being played are shown in the display.
Press the or button repeatedly until the NAVI message appears in the display.
Different messages are shown in the display depending on the status of the navigation system:
$
P54.30-6074-31 (DE, EN, FR, SP, IT)
P54.30-6072-31 (DE, EN, FR, SP, IT)
If the navigation system is switched off, the NAVI OFF message is displayed.
1 Current track 2 Current CD (with CD changer*)

You can read about how to activate route guidance in the separate Audio 30 Export* or COMAND* system Operating Instructions.
Press the k or j button repeatedly until you have selected the track you require.
136
Controls in detail
Operating system
Malfunction memory menu You can call up messages relating to malfunctions which have occurred in the Malfunction memory menu. The message displayed depends on whether or not malfunctions have occurred. Risk of accident No malfunction The NO MALFUNCTION message is displayed if no malfunctions have occurred. Malfunctions occurred If malfunctions have occurred, the number of malfunctions is displayed:

Press the k or j button. This scrolls through the malfunction messages in order. You will find possible malfunctions in the "Practical advice" section (5 page 316).
i
When you have scrolled through all the malfunction messages, the display be55 gins again from the start.
The operating system only records and displays malfunctions and warnings from certain systems. Make sure, therefore, that the vehicle is safe to use. You could otherwise cause an accident as a result of the vehicle not being safe to use.

P54.30-6075-31 (DE, EN, FR, SP, IT)
1 Number of malfunctions
Press the or button repeatedly until the corresponding malfunction memory message appears in the display.
137
Controls in detail
Operating system
If malfunctions occur while you are driving, the number of malfunctions will be shown again in the display at the end of your journey (key in position 0 or removed from the ignition lock). Each malfunction is displayed for approximately five seconds. Press the reset button to display the next malfunction immediately.

Settings menu The SETTINGS... menu has two functions:

$
Resetting all settings You can reset the functions of all the submenus to the factory settings.

The reset function: RESET WITH RESET BUTTON which you can use to reset all the settings to the factory settings A collection of submenus which you can use to make individual settings for your vehicle Press the or button repeatedly until the SETTINGS... menu appears in the display.
To do this, press the reset button located on the left-hand side of the instrument cluster for approximately three seconds. The request prompting you to press the reset button once more to confirm appears in the display.
Press the reset button located on the left of the instrument cluster (5 page 126) repeatedly until you have viewed all the malfunction messages.
Press the reset button again. All the submenu functions are reset to their factory settings.
i
All malfunction messages are cleared from the malfunction memory when you turn the key back to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. Only the priority 1 malfunctions will then be displayed. Should any malfunctions reoccur, they are displayed once again. P54.30-6076-31 (DE, EN, FR, SP, IT)
138
Controls in detail
Operating system
Function Reset all settings Submenus in the Settings menu Reset submenu functions Instrument cluster submenu Lighting submenu Vehicle submenu Heater submenu Convenience submenu
Page 138 139 140 142 145 149 150 154
i
If you do not press the reset button a second time to confirm, the changed settings remain set. The SETTINGS... menu is displayed again after approximately five seconds. If the settings are reset while the vehicle is being driven, the LIGHT CIRCUIT HEADLAMP MODE function in the LIGHTING submenu is not reset for safety reasons. The LIGHTING CANNOT BE COMPLETELY RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS WHILE DRIVING! message appears in the
Submenus in the Settings menu

Press the k or j button. All the submenus are shown in the display.
P54.30-6077-31 (DE, EN, FR, SP, IT) Press the button. The next submenu is selected.
display.
139
Controls in detail
Operating system
The submenus are ordered in a hierarchy. You can scroll down by pressing the button and up by pressing the button. You can select individual functions within the submenus by pressing the k or j button. You can modify the settings again yourself using the or button. Resetting submenu functions You can reset the functions in each submenu to the factory settings.
i
Resetting functions to the factory settings is only possible at very low road speeds. Therefore, reset the settings when the vehicle is stationary.

Press the reset button again. All functions in the submenu are reset to their factory settings.
i
If you do not press the reset button a second time to confirm, the changed settings remain set. The previously selected submenu is displayed again after five seconds.
Select a function within the submenu by pressing the k or j button. Press the reset button located on the left-hand side of the instrument cluster for approximately three seconds. The request prompting you to press the reset button once more to confirm appears in the display.
140
Controls in detail
Operating system
This table shows the settings you can make in the individual submenus. You will find additional information on the following pages. Instrument cluster Set the hours (time) Set the minutes (time) Select the time display Select the temperature display Select the speedometer and total distance recorder display Select the language Select the display for the standard display Lighting Set constant headlamp mode Switch the locator lighting on/off Set the exterior lighting delayed switch-off Set the interior lighting delayed switch-off Vehicle Set the station selection (radio) Set the automatic door lock Heater* Select the switch-on time Set the hours Set the minutes Select the heater booster* settings Convenience Activate the easy-entry feature Set key dependence Set the parking position for the exterior mirrors
141
Controls in detail
Operating system
Instrument cluster submenu You can set the clock in the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu and determine the displays in the instrument cluster. You will find the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu in the SETTINGS... menu. The following settings are possible: Function Set the hours (time) Set the minutes (time) Select the time display Select the temperature display Select the speedometer and total distance recorder display Select the language Select the display for the standard display Page 142 142 143 143 144 144 145 P54.30-6201-31 Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-7431-31 Franzsisch: P54.30-7450-31 Italienisch: P54.30-6201it-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6860sp-31 Setting the hours This function is only displayed if you have an Audio 10 or Audio 10 CD* system fitted in the vehicle.

Set the hours by pressing the or button. The hours are set and stored.
Select the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu by pressing the or button. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the SET TIME HOURS message appears in the display. The hour figure is highlighted.
Setting the minutes This function is only displayed if you have an Audio 10 or Audio 10 CD* system fitted in the vehicle.

Select the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu by pressing the or button.
142
Controls in detail
Operating system

Press the j or k button repeatedly until the SET TIME MINUTES message appears in the display. The minute figure is highlighted.
Selecting the time display

Selecting the temperature display

Select the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu by pressing the or button. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the 12/24 HOUR message appears in the display. The current setting is highlighted.
Select the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu by pressing the or button. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the TEMP. INDICATOR message appears in the display. The current setting is highlighted.
P54.30-6202-31 Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-7432-31 Franzsisch: P54.30-7449-31 Italienisch: P54.30-6202it-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6861sp-31

Set the minutes by pressing the or button. The minutes are set and stored.
P54.30-6203-31 Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-7433-31 Franzsisch: P54.30-6203fr-31 Italienisch: P54.30-6203it-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6203sp-31

P54.30-6204-31 Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6204en-31 Franzsisch: P54.30-6204fr-31 Italienisch: P54.30-6204it-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6862sp-31

Select the 12h or 24h display by pressing the or button.
Select the temperature display in C (degrees Celsius) or F (degrees Fahrenheit) by pressing the or button.
143
Controls in detail
Operating system
Selecting the display values for the speedometer, total distance recorder and trip computer

Selecting the language

You can choose between:

$ $ $ $ $
Select the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu by pressing the or button. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the DISPLAY VALUES IN message appears in the display. The current setting is highlighted.
Select the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu by pressing the or button. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the TEXT message appears in the display. The current setting is highlighted.
German (DEUTSCH) English (ENGLISH) French (FRANCAIS) Italian (ITALIANO) Spanish (ESPANOL)


Select the required display in km or miles by pressing the or button.
Select the language in which you wish the operating system messages to be displayed by pressing the or button.
144
Controls in detail
Operating system
Selecting the standard display1

Lighting submenu You can reach the LIGHTING submenu via the SETTINGS... menu. You can determine the following settings for your vehicle's lighting in the LIGHTING submenu: Function Set constant headlamp mode Switch the locator lighting on/ off Set the exterior lighting delayed switch-off Set the interior lighting delayed switch-off Page 145 146 147 148
Setting constant headlamp mode If you have set constant headlamp mode and the light switch is at 0, the following light up automatically:
$ $
Select the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu by pressing the or button. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the SELECT DISPLAY message appears in the display. The current setting is highlighted.
Side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps Licence plate illumination
1 Except the United Kingdom.
P54.30-6207-31 Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6207en-31 Franzsisch: P54.30-7448-31 Italienisch: P54.30-6207it-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6207sp-31

For safety reasons, you can only select these settings when the vehicle is stationary. This function is not available in countries in which there is a legal requirement to use constant headlamp mode.

Select the LIGHTING submenu by pressing the or button. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the LIGHT CIRCUIT HEADLAMP MODE message appears in the display. The current setting is highlighted.
55
Select the required display by pressing the or button.
145
Controls in detail
Operating system
P54.30-6210-31 Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-7434-31 Franzsisch: P54.30-7447-31 Italienisch: P54.30-7455-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6210sp-31

i
If you turn the light switch to a position other than 0, the respective light comes on. If you reset the settings in the LIGHTING submenu to the factory settings while the vehicle is moving (5 page 140), this setting will not be reset for safety reasons. In this case, the LIGHTING CANNOT BE
COMPLETELY RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS WHILE DRIVING! message appears in the
Switching the locator lighting on/off If you switch the locator lighting to ON, the following lights are switched on after the vehicle is unlocked using the remote control when it is dark:
$ $ $ $
Select whether you wish to operate the lighting manually or whether you wish to set constant headlamp mode by pressing the or button.
The side lamps The tail lamps The licence plate illumination The front foglamps when you open the driver's door when you switch on the ignition automatically after no more than 40 seconds
The lights are switched off:

$ $
display.
or
$
146
Controls in detail
Operating system

Select the LIGHTING submenu by pressing the or button. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the LOCATOR LIGHTING message appears in the display. The current setting is highlighted.
Setting the exterior lighting delayed switch-off You can set whether and for how long you wish the exterior lighting to remain switched on in the dark after closing the doors by using the HEADLAMPS DELAYED SWITCH-OFF function. The following lights are switched on when you have set the delayed switch-off and removed the key from the ignition:
$ $ $ $

Select the LIGHTING submenu by pressing the or button. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the HEADLAMPS DELAYED SWITCH-OFF message appears in the display. The current setting is highlighted.

The side lamps The tail lamps The licence plate illumination The front foglamps
Switch the locator lighting ON or OFF by pressing the or button.
P54.30-6212-31 Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6212en-31 Franzsisch: P54.30-7446-31 Italienisch: P54.30-7454-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6212sp-31

i
You can reactivate this function within ten minutes by opening a door. If none of the doors is opened after the key is removed from the ignition lock, the exterior lighting goes out after 60 seconds.
Select the length of time you wish the lights to remain on by pressing the 55 or button.
147
Controls in detail
Operating system
You can choose between:
$ $
0 s: delayed switch-off is deactivat-
Setting the interior lighting delayed switch-off You can set whether and for how long you wish the interior lighting to remain switched on in the dark after the key has been removed from the ignition lock using the INT. LIGHTING DELAYED SWITCH-OFF function.

ed
15 s, 30 s, 45 s or 60 s: delayed
switch-off is activated You can temporarily deactivate delayed switch-off:

P54.30-6213-31 Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-7435-31 Franzsisch: P54.30-6213fr-31 Italienisch: P54.30-6213it-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6213sp-31

To do this, turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock before leaving the vehicle (5 page 35). Then turn it to position 2 and back to 0 again. Delayed switch-off is deactivated. It is reactivated when the engine is started again.
Select the LIGHTING submenu by pressing the or button. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the INT. LIGHTING DELAYED SWITCH-OFF message appears in the display. The current setting is highlighted.
Select the length of time you wish the lights to remain on by pressing the or button. You can choose between:
$ $
0 s: delayed switch-off is deacti-
vated.
5 s, 10 s, 15 s or 20 s: delayed
switch-off is activated.
148
Controls in detail
Operating system
Vehicle submenu You will find the VEHICLE submenu in the SETTINGS... menu. The following settings are possible in the VEHICLE submenu: Function Station selection (radio) Automatic door locking Page 149 150

Setting the station selection You can determine whether the radio searches for a new station or selects a preset station each time the radio is operated (5 page 135) using the PRESS BUTTON IN AUDIO MODE function.


Select the VEHICLE submenu by pressing the or button. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the PRESS BUTTON IN AUDIO MODE message appears in the display. The current setting is highlighted.
Select how you wish the radio to search for a station using the or button:
$ $
STATION SEARCH: the next frequency
is selected.
MEMORY: the next stored station is selected.
149
Controls in detail
Operating system
Setting the automatic door lock You can switch the automatic door lock on or off using this function. If the automatic door lock is switched on, the vehicle automatically locks centrally from a road speed of around 15 km/h. You will find further information about the automatic door lock on (5 page 91).

Select the VEHICLE submenu by pressing the or button. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK message appears in the display. The current setting is highlighted.
Heater submenu* There is only a HEATER submenu if your vehicle has auxiliary heating* or a diesel engine. You will find the HEATER submenu in the SETTINGS... menu.
i
You can also reach this function by moving the key to position 1 in the ignition lock and pressing the auxiliary heating button. You can enter up to three switch-on times for the auxiliary heating*. However, you may only activate one switch-on time.

Switch the AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK on or off by pressing the or button.
150
Controls in detail
Operating system
You can make the following settings: Function Select the switch-on time Change the switch-on time Select the heater booster* settings Selecting the switch-on time You can set up to three switch-on times using the AUXILIARY HEATING SWITCH-ON TIME function. Set the exact switch-on time using the additional functions in the HEATER submenu. Page 151 152 153 A switch-on time is activated if it has been selected and:
$ $
Risk of fire and poisoning
the key has been removed from the ignition lock a different menu has been selected The yellow indicator lamp in the auxiliary heating* switch on the centre console then lights up (5 page 194).
Hot and poisonous exhaust fumes are produced when the auxiliary heating* or heater booster system are in operation. When the vehicle is being refuelled, fuel vapours may ignite on the hot exhaust system. Do not switch on the auxiliary heating*:
$ $
Set the temperature using Thermatic (5 page 184). You can switch off the auxiliary heating* using the remote control. The auxiliary heating* switches off automatically after 50 minutes. You can have this time changed. Visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, for this purpose.
at the filling station in confined spaces with no ventilation, e.g. in the garage You could otherwise endanger yourself and others.
55
151
Controls in detail
Operating system

Select the HEATER submenu by pressing the or button. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the AUXILIARY HEATING SWITCH-ON TIME message appears in the display. The current setting is highlighted.
Changing the switch-on time This function is only displayed if you have selected a switch-on time. Enter the time at which the auxiliary heating* is to be switched on.

Press the j button again.
Select the HEATER submenu by pressing the or button. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the AUXILIARY HEATING SWITCH-ON TIME n HOURS message appears in the display.

P54.30-6217-31 Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6217en-31 Franzsisch: P54.30-fr-7444-31 Italienisch: P54.30-6217it-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6217sp-31

Set the minute at which the auxiliary heating* is to be switched on by pressing the or button. The modified switch-on times are stored again as soon as you quit the menu.
Select the time when you wish the auxiliary heating* to switch on by pressing the or button.
$ $
TIME 1, TIME 2, TIME 3: The time is selected TIMER OFF: The auxiliary heating*

does not switch on automatically.
Set the hour at which the auxiliary heating* is to be switched on by pressing the or button.
152
Controls in detail
Operating system
Selecting the heater booster* settings Vehicles with a diesel engine are equipped with a heater booster system. This means that less time is required for heating up the vehicle interior and for the engine to reach its operating temperature.
$
P54.30-6220-31 Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-7436-31 Franzsisch: P54.30-7443-31 Italienisch: P54.30-7453-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6864sp-31

OFF WITH AC-OFF: You can switch the heater booster on and off by pressing the button (economy mode) on the Thermatic control panel (5 page 184).
Select the HEATER submenu by pressing the or button. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the HEATER BOOSTER message appears in the display. The selection marker is on the current setting.
Set the control conditions for the heater booster system by pressing the or button. You can choose between:
$
Switched off: The indicator lamp in the button is lit. Switched on: The indicator lamp in the button is not lit. The heater booster switches on automatically if the outside temperature is below 8 C and the coolant temperature is less than 70 C. It switches off again automatically at higher temperatures.
$
AUTOMATIC: The heater booster
switches on automatically if the outside temperature is below 8 C and the coolant temperature is less than 70 C. It switches off again automatically at higher temperatures.
OFF: The heater booster is switched off. This reduces diesel consumption.
153
Controls in detail
Operating system
Convenience submenu You will find the CONVENIENCE submenu in the SETTINGS... menu. You can make the following settings in the CONVENIENCE submenu: Function Activate the easy-entry feature Set key dependence Set the parking position for the exterior mirrors Page 154 156 156 Activating the easy-entry feature You can activate or deactivate the easyentry feature using the EASY-ENTRY FEATURE ACTIVATE function. Depending on the setting, the steering wheel and driver's seat will move back when you:
$ $
Risk of injury
remove the key from the ignition lock open the driver's door and the key is in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock (5 page 35)
If the easy-entry feature is active, the steering wheel and driver's seat will move in accordance with the setting. Occupants could become trapped as a result. When the easyentry feature is activated, make sure that nobody can become trapped when this feature is triggered. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. Children could open the driver's door from the inside, and thereby unintentionally activate the easy-entry feature and become trapped.
154
Controls in detail
Operating system
After you enter the vehicle, the steering wheel and seat move to the stored position if the following conditions are met:
$ $ $
Select the CONVENIENCE submenu by pressing the or button. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the EASY-ENTRY FEATURE ACTIVATE message appears in the display. The selection marker is on the current setting.
Activate the easy-entry feature by pressing the or button. You can determine the following settings for the easy-entry feature:
$ $
The driver's door is closed. The key is in the ignition lock. You press the appropriate memory button on the memory switch (5 page 102).
OFF: The easy-entry feature is deac-
tivated.
STEERING COLUMN: The easy-entry feature is activated.
i
To interrupt the adjustment procedure, perform one of the following actions:
$ $
Move the steering column adjustment lever (5 page 29) Press memory button M on the memory switch (5 page 102)
P54.30-6221-31 Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6221en-31 Franzsisch: P54.30-7442-31 Italienisch: P54.30-6221it-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6221sp-31
155
Controls in detail
Operating system
Setting key dependence You can use the SETTINGS KEY-DEPENDENT function to determine whether the following settings should be stored as key-dependent settings:
$ $ $

The exterior mirror swings back to its original position:

$
after you have disengaged reverse gear (with a delay of approximately ten seconds) when you reach a speed greater than 10 km/h, regardless of the gear engaged if you press the button for the driver's side exterior mirror immediately (5 page 103) Select the CONVENIENCE submenu by pressing the or button. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING message appears in the display. The selection marker is on the current setting.
Seat Steering wheel Mirrors Select the CONVENIENCE submenu by pressing the or button. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the SETTINGS KEY-DEPENDENT message appears in the display. The selection marker is on the current setting.
Switch key dependence ON or OFF by pressing the or button.
Setting the parking position for the exterior mirrors Use the MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING function to determine whether the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side swings down (5 page 103) when you are parking the vehicle (selector lever position R).

156
Controls in detail
Operating system
Trip computer menu You can call up or reset the statistical information for your vehicle in the trip computer menu. The following submenus are available: Function Consumption statistics after start Consumption statistics since the last reset Call up the range Page 157 158 159 Consumption statistics after start

P54.30-6223-31 Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-7437-31 Franzsisch: P54.30-7440-31 Italienisch: P54.30-6223it-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6223sp-31

Press the or button repeatedly until the AFTER START message appears in the display.
Switch the MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING function ON or OFF using the or button.
P54.30-6224-31 Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6224en-31 Franzsisch: P54.30-6224fr-31 Italienisch: P54.30-6224it-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6224sp-31 1 Time elapsed since the start 2 Average fuel consumption after start 3 Average speed after start 4 Kilometres covered after start
i
The consumption statistics AFTER START are always displayed first when you call up the trip computer.
157
Controls in detail
Operating system
i
All values relating to the last start are reset if you stop the vehicle for longer than four hours (key in position 0 or removed from the ignition lock). These values are not reset if you turn the key back to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock within this time. Resetting the consumption statistics

Press and hold the reset button located on the left-hand side of the instrument cluster (5 page 19) until the values are reset to 0.
Consumption statistics since the last reset

P54.30-6225-31 Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6225en-31 Franzsisch: P54.30-6225fr-31 Italienisch: P54.30-6225it-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6225sp-31 1 Time elapsed since the last reset 2 Average fuel consumption since the last reset 3 Average speed since the last reset 4 Kilometres covered since the last reset Press and hold the reset button located on the left-hand side of the instrument cluster (5 page 19) until the consumption statistics are reset to 0.
Press the or button repeatedly until the AFTER START message appears in the display. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the AFTER RESET message appears in the display.
Press the or button repeatedly until you see the first function in the Trip computer menu. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the message you wish to reset appears in the display.
158
Controls in detail
Operating system
Calling up the range

TEL* menu You can operate the permanently installed telephone in your vehicle or the mobile phone using the functions in the TEL menu if it is connected to the Mercedes-Benz hands-free system and switched on.

Press the or button repeatedly until the AFTER START message appears in the display. Press the j or k button repeatedly until the RANGE: message appears in the display.
Different messages are shown in the display depending on the status of your telephone:
$ $
If the telephone is off, the TEL OFF or TEL AUS message is displayed If you have still not entered the PIN, the TEL ENTER PIN message is displayed

P54.30-6226-31 Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6226en-31 Franzsisch: P54.30-6226fr-31 Italienisch: P54.30-6226it-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6226sp-31 The approximate range is shown in the display and is derived from the current fuel level and driving style.
Switch on the telephone and the COMAND* or audio system. For notes on how to do this, see the separate Operating Instructions.
Enter the PIN in the telephone. The telephone searches for a network. The display is empty during this time.
Press the or button repeatedly until the TEL menu appears in the display.
As soon as the telephone has found a network, the name of the network provider will be shown in the display
i
The range is no longer displayed when the reserve fuel is reached.
159
Controls in detail
Operating system
You can operate the telephone using the operating system once this display of operational readiness is shown. Accepting a call You can accept a call at any time if your telephone is ready to receive. The following message appears in the display when you receive a call: P54.30-6229-31 Fr alle Sprachen das selbe Bild.
P54.30-6228-31 Fr alle Sprachen das selbe Bild.
i
Display on vehicles with the audio system
If the display of operational readiness disappears, the vehicle is outside the range of transmission and reception. The following functions are available: Function Accept a call Hang up Dial a number in the phone book Redial Page 160 161 161 163
1 Network provider 2 Reception quality P54.30-6227-31 Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6227en-31 Franzsisch: P54.30-6227fr-31 Italienisch: P54.30-6227it-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6227sp-31
Display on vehicles with the COMAND* sys tem
Display on vehicles with the audio system
Display on vehicles with the COMAND* sys tem
1 Network provider 2 Reception quality
160
Controls in detail
Operating system

Press the button. You have accepted the call. The call duration is shown in the display.
Dialling a number in the phone book You can look for and dial a number in the phone book at any time if your telephone is ready to receive.
i
Press the button if you do not wish to accept the call. The caller will then hear the engaged tone. Hanging up

i
You can only enter new numbers directly into the phone book on the telephone. For notes on how to do this, see the separate Operating Instructions.

The operating system loads the phone book stored on the SIM card or in the telephone. This can take up to 30 seconds. The following messages appear in the display, depending on the equipment installed on your vehicle:
$ $
Audio system: PROCESSING COMAND* system: PLEASE WAIT!
Press the button.
You have hung up. The telephone's operational readiness is displayed again (name of the network provider).
Press the or button repeatedly until the TEL menu appears with the operational readiness symbol in the display. Press the j or k button.
When the PROCESSING or PLEASE WAIT! message disappears, the phone book is 55 stored in the operating system.
161
Controls in detail
Operating system

Press the j or k button repeatedly until the name you are searching for appears in the display. The stored names are then displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical order.
Press the button. The operating system dials the phone number displayed.
P54.30-6232-31 Hier auch bei COMAND, fr alle Sprachen das selbe Bild.
When a connection is established, the name of the person you are calling and the call duration appear in the display. P54.30-6231-31 Hier auch bei COMAND, fr alle Sprachen das selbe Bild.
i
The operating system scrolls through the names rapidly if you press and hold the j or k button for more than one second. Fast mode stops when you release the button. If you no longer wish to make a call, you can press the button at any time. The search will then be interrupted and the name of the network provider will be shown in the display again.
Example of the display on vehicles with the COMAND* system installed
If no connection is established, the operating system stores the dialled number in the redial memory.
Example of the display on vehicles with the COMAND* system installed
1 Name from the phone book 2 Memory preset number
162
Controls in detail
Operating system
Redialling The operating system stores the most recently dialled phone numbers. This means that you do not have to search through the entire phone book.

i
Press the button if you do not wish to make a call.

Memory preset number The most recently dialled numbers are always stored. The number of stored numbers depends on which telephone you use. Most recently dialled number:
$ $
Press the button. The operating system dials the phone number displayed.
Press the or button repeatedly until the TEL menu appears with the operational readiness symbol in the display. Press the button. The last number dialled is shown in the display in the redial memory.
on vehicles with the audio system: L1 on vehicles with the COMAND* system: LO on vehicles with the audio system: L2 to Ln on vehicles with the COMAND* system: L1 to Ln
When a connection is established, the call duration appears in the display along with:
$ $
the name, if this is stored in the phone book the phone number dialled
Previously dialled numbers:

$ $
Press the j or k button repeatedly until the number you are searching for is shown in the display.
163
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
The automatic transmission automatically adapts to your individual driving style by continuously adjusting its shift points. These shift point adjustments take into account the current operating and driving conditions. If the operating or driving conditions change, the automatic transmission reacts by adjusting the gearshift pattern.
Risk of accident
Risk of accident
The movement of the pedals must not be restricted. Always keep the driver's footwell free from objects. Make sure that floormats or carpets do not obstruct the pedals. Always apply the parking brake when parking. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could move the selector lever and the vehicle could roll away on uphill or downhill gradients. Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid.
Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid.
Risk of fire
i
On vehicles with a petrol engine, the automatic transmission shifts after a cold start at higher engine speeds. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly.
Make sure that the exhaust system does not come into contact with easily ignitable material, such as dry grass or petrol. The flammable material may otherwise ignite and set fire to parts of the vehicle.
You will find information about driving with an automatic transmission in the "Getting started" section (5 page 36).
164
Controls in detail
$ $ $
the HIGH or LOW transfer case position the position of the accelerator pedal the road speed
In selector lever position D, you can influence shifts made by the automatic transmission by:
$ $
restricting the shift range shifting manually
P27.00-2107-31
The selector lever position/shift range and the transfer case position are shown in the multi-function display.
P54.30-6034-31
The automatic transmission shifts automatically through the individual gears. This depends on:
$
1 Transfer case display 2 Selector lever position/shift range
the selector lever position D with the shift ranges 4, 3, 2 and 1
165
Controls in detail
Selector lever positions Parking lock Park position with selector lever lock. Engage the parking lock only when the vehicle is stationary. It is then additionally protected when the engine is switched off. You can only remove the key from selector lever position P. When the key is removed, the selector lever is locked in position P. Reverse gear Only move the selector lever to position R when the vehicle is stationary.
Neutral No power is transferred from the engine to the drive wheels. The vehicle is free to move when the brakes are released, to be pushed or towed for example. Do not move the selector lever to N while the vehicle is in motion. You could otherwise damage the automatic transmission. Only shift briefly to N if:
$
Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All five forward gears are shifted automatically. Use this selector lever position for all normal driving situations.
One-touch gearshifting When the automatic transmission is in selector lever position D, you can also change gear yourself. Downshifting:

ESP has been deactivated or has malfunctioned and the vehicle threatens to skid, e.g. on slippery roads in winter you wish to shift the transfer case
Press the selector lever briefly to the left towards D. The automatic transmission shifts down one gear, depending on the gear currently engaged. Doing this also restricts the shift range.
166
Controls in detail
Upshifting

Risk of accident
Selecting the ideal shift range

Do not shift down until the road speed is in the permissible range for the gear required (5 page 396). The drive wheels could otherwise lock. Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid.
Press the selector lever briefly to the right towards D+. The automatic transmission shifts up one gear, depending on the gear currently engaged. Doing this also extends the shift range.
Press and hold the selector lever towards D. The automatic transmission changes to the shift range from which you can accelerate or slow down the vehicle most effectively. To do this, the automatic transmission shifts down one or several gears automatically.
Derestricting the shift range

i
The automatic transmission does not change down if you move the selector lever to D when travelling too quickly. The engine could otherwise overrev.
Press the selector lever in the direction of D+ and hold it until D is displayed in the multi-function display again. The automatic transmission shifts back to D from the current shift range.
Shift ranges When the selector lever is in position D, you can restrict or derestrict the shift range for the automatic transmission.

Press the selector lever briefly to the right towards D+ or to the left towards D. The shift range set is shown in the multi-function display.
167
Controls in detail
i
The transmission shifts up, even if the shift range has been restricted, if the maximum engine speed for the shift range is reached and you continue to accelerate. The engine could otherwise overrev.
The shift range changes to the currently engaged gear if you press and hold the selector lever to the right or left. The automatic transmission shifts as far as fourth gear only. The automatic transmission shifts as far as third gear only. The braking effect of the engine can be utilised in this position.
The automatic transmission shifts as far as second gear only. For braking on steep downhill gradients and for driving:
$ $ $
on steep mountain roads in mountainous terrain in arduous driving conditions
!
If the transfer case is in the LOW offroad position, the automatic transmission will not shift up automatically when it reaches the engine speed limit for that range. There is a danger of engine damage. It must be ensured that the permissible engine speed is not exceeded.
The automatic transmission only works in first gear. For braking on extremely steep downhill gradients and long downhill mountain roads.
168
Controls in detail
Driving tips Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear:
$ $
Release the accelerator pedal as soon as the desired speed has been reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up again, depending on the engine speed.
Trailer towing

Run the engine at a moderate engine speed on uphill gradients. Depending upon the uphill or downhill gradient, shift down to shift range 3 or 2 even when cruise control is activated. Shift the transfer case to the LOW offroad gear (5 page 170) for extreme uphill or downhill gradients.
Little throttle: early upshifts More throttle: later upshifts
Stopping the vehicle If you are only stopping briefly:

Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.

Leave the selector lever in the driving position. Use the brake to make sure that the vehicle does not roll away.
Working on the vehicle Risk of accident
Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts down one gear, depending on the engine speed.
Manoeuvring If manoeuvring within a confined space:

Control the speed by braking carefully. Accelerate only slightly and avoid jerking.
Apply the parking brake when carrying out any work on the vehicle with the engine running and move the selector lever to position P. The vehicle could otherwise roll away.
169
Controls in detail
Transfer case
You will find information about off-road driving in the "Operation" section (5 page 269). Transfer case switch The switch is located in the lower section of the centre console.
i
The vehicle has permanent four-wheeldrive. The front and rear axles are always driven. Shift ranges H HIGH Road position for all normal driving situations. L LOW Off-road position for off-road driving. N
Also use the off-road position on steep uphill and downhill gradients, especially when towing a trailer. The transfer case reduces the drive power of the engine. The vehicle drives at approximately half the speed compared to when the HIGH road position is selected. The drive performance is thereby increased accordingly. Neutral Neutral position No power is transferred to the wheels.
P54.25-2814-31
Transfer case switch
170
Controls in detail
Transfer case
The transfer case display in the multi-function display indicates the shift status of the transfer case. From HIGH to LOW From LOW to HIGH
!
You may only shift if:
$
!
You may only shift if:
$ $ $ $
the engine is running the vehicle is rolling the automatic transmission is in selector lever position N you are driving no faster than 40 km/h

the engine is running the vehicle is rolling the automatic transmission is in selector lever position N you are driving no faster than 70 km/h
P54.30-6034-31
$ $ $
1 Transfer case display 2 Selector lever position (automatic transmission) Risk of accident
Press LOW on the upper section of the transfer case switch. L is shown in transfer case display 1 if the shift procedure is completed.
Press HIGH on the lower section of the transfer case switch. H is shown in transfer case display 1 if the shift procedure is completed.
Always apply the parking brake when parking. Make sure that the transfer case is not in neutral position N when parking the vehicle. The vehicle could otherwise be set in motion.
171
Controls in detail
Transfer case
If the shift procedure was not completed, the following messages may appear in the multi-function display:
$
Shifting to neutral

TC SHIFT CONDITIONS NOT FULFILLED
Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (5 page 35). Apply the parking brake (5 page 36). Depress the brake pedal. Move the selector lever to N (5 page 166). Press LOW on the transfer case switch for approximately five seconds. N is shown in transfer case display 1 if the shift procedure is completed.
Risk of accident
You have not complied with one or more shift conditions.

$
Make sure that the transfer case is not in neutral position N when parking the vehicle. The vehicle could otherwise be set in motion.
TC IN NEUTRAL
The transfer case has aborted the shift procedure and is in neutral position. N is shown in transfer case display 1.
$
i
A warning sounds and the TC IN NEUTRAL message appears in the multifunction display if you open a door when the transfer case is in the neutral position and the key is in the ignition lock.
TC SHIFT ABORTED
The transfer case has not carried out the shift procedure.

Carry out the shift procedure again.
172
Controls in detail
Differential locks Differential locks
You will find information about off-road driving in the "Operation" section (5 page 269). The differential locks improve the traction of the vehicle. Engage the differential locks:
$ $ $ $
!
Only accelerate moderately when pulling away with the differential locks engaged. To prevent damage to the transfer case, never operate the vehicle on a roller dynamometer (single axle roller dynamometer) unless:
$
Risk of accident
on rough terrain to deactivate ABS and ESP on off-road terrain when fording when driving on snowy, icy or muddy surfaces
Do not drive on firm road surfaces with the differential locks engaged. Steering capability is severely restricted when the front axle differential lock is engaged, thus increasing the risk of an accident. ESP, BAS and ABS are automatically deactivated when you select a differential lock.
the non-driven axle is jacked up the relevant propeller shaft is disconnected the transfer case differential lock is engaged
or
$
!
Do not engage the front-axle differential lock on tight bends. The steering capability of the vehicle is otherwise severely restricted.
and
$
173
Controls in detail
Differential locks
Engaging the differential locks A total of three differential locks can be engaged:
$
The switches are located on the upper section of the centre console.
Engaging the transfer case differential lock

Press the lower section of switch 1. The yellow engagement indicator lamp beneath switch 1 lights up.
The transfer case differential lock which controls compensation between the axles The rear-axle differential lock which controls compensation between the rear wheels The front-axle differential lock which controls compensation between the front wheels
P54.25-2818-31
The v warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The red function indicator lamp above switch 1 only lights up when the differential lock is engaged.
i
You can only engage the differential locks in the sequence 1, 2, 3.
1 Transfer case differential lock 2 Rear-axle differential lock 3 Front-axle differential lock 4 Engagement indicator lamps (yellow) 5 Function indicator lamps (red)
The ABS NOT AVAILABLE DISABLING ACTIVE message appears in the multifunction display. The v and - warning lamps then light up in the instrument cluster.
!
Only engage the differential locks if:
$ $
you are driving more or less at walking speed the drive wheels are not spinning
174
Controls in detail
Differential locks
The DIFFERENTIAL LOCK message appears in the multi-function display. The transfer case differential lock is engaged. ESP, BAS and ABS are deactivated. You may now switch to front-axle differential lock 3 and/or rear-axle differential lock 2, depending on driving requirements. Engaging the rear-axle differential lock

Engaging the front-axle differential lock

Press the lower section of switch 3. The yellow engagement indicator lamp lights up first, then the red function indicator lamp. The front-axle differential lock is engaged.
ESP, BAS and ABS are activated automatically after approximately three seconds of normal driving. The DIFFERENTIAL LOCK in the multi-function display and the v and - warning lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
i
If red indicator lamps 5 do not go out when the differential locks are disengaged:

Disengaging the differential locks You can disengage the differential locks in the reverse sequence (3, 2, 1). To disengage both differential locks simultaneously:

Press the lower section of switch 2. The yellow engagement indicator lamp lights up first, then the red function indicator lamp. The rear-axle differential lock is engaged.
Observe the road and traffic conditions. Gently turn the steering wheel to move the vehicle from side to side. The red function indicator lamps will then go out.
Press the lower section of switch 1. The yellow engagement indicator lamps go out. The red function indicator lamps go out when the differential locks are disengaged.
175
Controls in detail
Good visibility
You will find information about the windscreen wipers (5 page 41) and about adjusting the mirrors (5 page 30) in the "Getting started" section. You will find information about how to deal with a misted-up windscreen (5 page 189) and about defrosting (5 page 188) in the "Automatic air conditioning" section. P54.25-2852-31 Headlamp cleaning system The switch is located on the left-hand side on the cockpit. Mirrors Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors The rear-view mirror and exterior mirrors automatically enter anti-dazzle mode if at the same time:
$ $
the ignition is switched on headlamp light entering from outside comes into contact with the sensor in the mirror
The mirrors do not enter anti-dazzle mode if: 1 To clean the headlamps
$ $
reverse gear is engaged the interior lighting is switched on
Make sure that the ignition is switched on. Press switch 1 briefly. The headlamps are cleaned by a highpressure water jet.
176
Controls in detail
Good visibility !
If electrolyte comes into contact with the vehicle's paintwork, wash it off immediately using clean water. It could otherwise damage the paintwork. The electrolyte can only be washed off before it dries. Heated exterior mirrors The exterior mirrors are heated automatically when the outside temperature is low.
Risk of accident
Risk of injury
The mirrors do not dim automatically if light from other vehicles' headlamps cannot strike the sensor in the rear-view mirror, e.g. when towing a trailer or when the luggage compartment is laden up to the roof. You could be dazzled by incident light. You may no longer be able to observe the traffic conditions and could cause an accident. In this case, you should dim the rear-view mirror manually.
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. Electrolyte is an aggressive substance and must not be allowed to come into contact with the skin, eyes or respiratory organs. If electrolyte comes into contact with the eyes or skin, immediately rinse thoroughly with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
177
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Activating the exterior mirror parking position (front-passenger side) To make it easier for you to park, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side swings into the parking position as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can only activate the parking position if you have already stored it using the memory function (5 page 102).

Make sure that the ignition is switched on. Make sure that the MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING function is activated in the CONVENIENCE submenu (5 page 156). Select reverse gear (selector lever position R). or Press the selector button (5 page 103) for the front-passenger side exterior mirror. The mirror on the front-passenger side folds down into the stored position.
The exterior mirror swings back to its original position:

$ $ $
approximately 10 seconds after reverse gear is disengaged as soon as you drive faster than 10 km/h if you press the selector button (5 page 103) for the driver's side exterior mirror
178
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Windscreen wipers You will find information about the windscreen wipers in the "Getting started" section (5 page 41). Intermittent wipe

Make sure that the ignition is switched on. Move the combination switch to setting I (5 page 41). This will result in a wiper sweep. Thereafter, the wipe intervals are controlled in accordance with how wet the windscreen is.
Windscreen heating Risk of accident
i
If the vehicle is stationary and a front door is open, the windscreen wipers will not operate on intermittent wipe, setting I (5 page 41). This protects people entering and leaving the vehicle from being splashed with water. Rain sensor The rain sensor controls the windscreen wipers automatically according to how wet the windscreen is.
Clear all ice or snow from the windscreen and rear window before commencing a journey. Impaired vision could otherwise endanger yourself and others.
Rear window wiper
!
The window heating consumes a great deal of electricity. You should therefore switch off the heating as soon as the windows are clear again.
i
The rear wiper comes on automatically if the windscreen wipers are switched on and you engage reverse gear.
179
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Windscreen heating* The windscreen heating is combined with the Thermatic defrosting function (5 page 188). The heating time for the windscreen heating is variable and is controlled in accordance with the outside temperature and the temperature of the engine. Rear window heating The rear window heating switches off automatically after approximately 6 to 7 minutes. This depends on the outside temperature and the driving conditions. The rear window heating only operates when the engine is running. The rear window heating switches off automatically if too many consumers are switched on or the battery is not sufficiently charged. The indicator lamp in the button flashes. The rear window heating will automatically switch back on as soon as there is sufficient voltage again.

Switching on

Press the F button on the Thermatic control panel (5 page 184). The indicator lamp in the button lights up. The rear window heating is on.
Switching off

Press the F button. The indicator lamp in the button goes off. The rear window heating is off.
180
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Sun visors The sun visors protect you from glare during the journey. Risk of accident Glare from the front

Fold sun visors 1 down when the light is dazzling. P68.60-2044-31
Glare from the side

Fold down the sun visor. Pull the sun visor out of retainer 2. Swing the sun visor to the side. 3 Mirror cover 4 Lighting

Keep the mirrors in the sun visors covered while you are driving. Dazzling light may otherwise endanger yourself and others.
Mirror in the sun visor
i
P68.60-2043-31 Mirror light 4 only works if the sun visor is engaged in retainer 2.
Make sure that the ignition is switched on. Fold down the sun visor. Fold mirror cover 3 upwards. Mirror lighting 4 comes on.
1 Sun visor 2 Retainer
181
Controls in detail
Thermatic (automatic air conditioning)
P83.30-3663-31
182
Controls in detail
1 Demister vents for the windscreen 2 Swivelling centre air vents 3 Thumbwheel for centre air vents 4 Swivelling side air vents 5 Demister vents for side windows 6 Thumbwheel for side air vents 7 Footwell air vents 8 Control panel
Risk of injury
i
For practically draught-free ventilation, position the centre and side air vent sliders centrally.
When Thermatic is in operation, very hot or very cold air may flow from the air vents. This could cause burns or frostbite to bare skin in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. Keep bare skin away from these air outlets. If necessary, use the air-distribution control to direct the airflow away from the footwell to a different area of the vehicle interior.
183
Controls in detail
Control panel Rear air vents
1 Sets the blower, switches Thermatic on/off 2 Sets the temperature for the left-hand side of the vehicle
P83.30-3633-31
3 Sets the temperature for the righthand side of the vehicle 4 Adjusts the air distribution manually 5 Rear window heating 6 Activates/deactivates cooling, residual heat/auxiliary ventilation 7 Automatic air distribution and blower control 8 Air-recirculation mode 9 Demist button
P83.00-2089-31
Thermatic control panel
1 Thumbwheel for rear-compartment centre air vents 2 Swivelling rear-compartment centre air vents
184
Controls in detail
Thermatic is only operational while the engine is running. It can only function properly when all the windows and the sliding sunroof* are closed. Thermatic can be switched off completely as required (5 page 186). You can allow the air conditioning to adjust automatically (5 page 187) or you can control it manually (5 page 187). In automatic mode, Thermatic cools or heats the vehicle interior depending on:
$ $ $
In automatic mode, you will seldom need to change the temperature, airflow or air distribution. The combination filter installed filters out all pollen as well as particles of dust to a great extent.
Thermatic consumes additional fuel, thereby damaging the environment and creating additional costs. To reduce your consumption:

Switch off cooling in cold weather conditions (5 page 186). Thermatic will then run in economy mode.
i
The replacement interval for the filter depends on environmental influences, such as high levels of air pollution. It may be shorter than the interval specified in the Service Booklet. A blocked filter reduces the air supply to the vehicle interior.

Ventilate the vehicle briefly in warm weather conditions, e.g. using the summer opening feature (5 page 85). This enables the desired temperature inside the vehicle to be reached more quickly.
the temperature selected the outside temperature sunlight
Switch off Thermatic completely if you are driving with the windows or sliding sunroof* open for a long time. This reduces the unnecessary consumption of energy for air conditioning.
185
Controls in detail
Observe the following notes to ensure that Thermatic functions correctly:
$
i
Condensation may form on the underside of the vehicle in cooling mode.
Switching Thermatic on and off Switching off

Keep the air inlet between the bonnet and the windscreen free of deposits, e.g. ice or snow, to ensure the flow of fresh air to the vehicle interior. Never cover the vents or air inlet and outlet grilles in the vehicle interior.
Environmental note
Turn airflow control 1 (5 page 184) to 0.
i
Select this setting when you are driving with the windows or the sliding sunroof* open, for example. Air supply and air circulation are switched off if Thermatic is switched off. Only select this setting for a brief period.
Risk of accident
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R 134 A. This refrigerant does not damage the earth's ozone layer.
Follow the settings for heating and cooling recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise mist up. You may no longer be able to observe the traffic conditions and could cause an accident.
186
Controls in detail
Switching on

Setting the temperature You can set the temperature separately for each side of the vehicle using controllers 2 and 3 (5 page 184). Change the temperature in small increments. We recommend a starting temperature of 22 C. Increasing the temperature

Adjusting air distribution manually

Turn airflow control 1 (5 page 184) to 1 or higher.
Basic settings Automatic mode

You can set the air distribution for the entire vehicle automatically (5 page 187) or manually using controller 4 (5 page 184). Symbol Meaning Directs air to the windscreen vents and to the demister vents for the side windows Directs air to the windscreen vents, the demister vents for the side windows and the front and rear footwells Directs air to the front and rear footwells Directs air to the centre, side and cockpit air vents
55
Press the U button. The indicator lamp in the button lights up. Airflow and air distribution will be controlled automatically.
Turn the temperature controller clockwise. Thermatic controls the set temperature.
Reducing the temperature

Turn the temperature controller anticlockwise. Thermatic controls the set temperature.
Y a
187
Controls in detail

Press the U button. The indicator lamp in the U button goes out. Automatic air distribution is switched off. Air distribution is controlled according to the current position of the controller.
Adjusting the airflow manually You can adjust the airflow automatically (5 page 187) or manually using controller 1 (5 page 184). There are six adjustment levels.

Defrosting Use the following settings to defrost the windscreen, e.g. when it is covered in ice.

Press the P button. The indicator lamp in the button lights up. Thermatic automatically switches to the following functions:
$ $ $ $
Turn the air-distribution controller to the required symbol. Air distribution is controlled according to the current position of the controller.
Press the U button. The indicator lamp in the U button goes out. Automatic airflow control is switched off. The airflow is controlled according to the current level set.
Maximum blower and heat output Air to the windscreen and the front side windows Windscreen heating* is switched on Rear ventilation off
Turn the airflow controller to the required position. The airflow is controlled according to the level selected.
188
Controls in detail
i
Only use this setting until the windscreen is clear again. Misted-up windows

Air-recirculation mode If there are unpleasant odours in the air outside, it is possible to switch off the supply of fresh air temporarily. Fresh air is then no longer taken in, and the air in the vehicle is recirculated. Risk of accident
Switching on

Press the button. The indicator lamp in the button lights up.
Switch on the windscreen wipers (5 page 179). Close the centre air vents in the cockpit (5 page 182). Make sure that the automatic transmission is switched on (5 page 187). The indicator lamp in the U button is lit.
i
The system switches to air-recirculation mode automatically at high outside temperatures. After approximately 30 minutes, a certain amount of outside air is taken in.
When the outside temperature is lower than 5 C, only switch to air-recirculation mode for a brief period. The windows could otherwise mist up, thus impairing visibility and endangering yourself and others. You may no longer be able to observe the traffic conditions and could cause an accident.
189
Controls in detail
Switching off

Residual heat If you have stopped the engine, you can heat the stationary vehicle for up to 30 minutes using residual heat from the engine.
Switching on

Press the button. The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
Switch off the ignition. Press the button. The indicator lamp in the button lights up.
i
Air-recirculation mode is deactivated automatically:
$
i
The heating period is dependent on:
$ $
Switching off

after about 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 5 C after about five minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 5 C after five minutes if economy mode is selected
the temperature selected on the control panel (5 page 184) the coolant temperature
Press the button. The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
The blower runs at a lower speed regardless of the current setting.
i
The residual heat function is deactivated automatically:
$ $ $ $
when you switch on the ignition after about 30 minutes if the battery voltage is too low if the coolant temperature is too low
190
Controls in detail
Economy mode The air is not cooled or dehumidified in economy mode. Switching on

Activating/deactivating the cooling function The cooling function is operational when the engine is running and cools according to the interior temperature selected. The cooling function also dehumidifies the air inside the vehicle and thus prevents the windows from misting up. Risk of accident
Environmental note
Press the button. The indicator lamp in the button lights up. The heater booster system* (5 page 196) is switched off.
If the cooling function is deactivated, the automatic air conditioning requires less energy. This will lower your fuel consumption and will cause less damage to the environment.
Deactivating You can deactivate the cooling function. The air in the vehicle is then not cooled or dehumidified.

Switching off

Press the button again. The indicator lamp in the button goes off. The system returns to the previous setting.
If you deactivate the cooling function, the vehicle will not be cooled in warm weather conditions. The windows could mist up more quickly. You may no longer be able to observe the traffic conditions and could cause an accident.
Press the button. The indicator lamp in the button is lit. The cooling function is deactivated.
191
Controls in detail
Activating The windows could mist up when the air is damp. You can dehumidify the air using the cooling function.

The rear vents are located on the centre console in the rear.
i
For draught-free ventilation, move the sliders for the rear air vents upwards as far as possible. Setting the airflow
Press the button. The indicator lamp in the button goes out. The cooling function is activated. P83.00-2089-31
Turn thumbwheel 1 up or down. This increases or reduces the airflow.
Rear-compartment air conditioning Rear-compartment air conditioning is controlled via the control panel for the automatic air conditioning (5 page 184). The airflow and air direction can be set individually on the rear vents. 1 Thumbwheel for rear centre air vents 2 Swivelling rear centre air vents Setting the air distribution

i
The temperature of the air flowing from the rear centre air vents and the centre air vents in the cockpit is the same.
Press the slider for the left or righthand centre air vents to the left, right, up or down. The airflow is directed in the corresponding direction.
192
Controls in detail
Auxiliary heating/ventilation* Auxiliary heating/ventilation*
The auxiliary heating/ventilation heats or ventilates the vehicle interior according to the settings you have selected on the Thermatic control panel (5 page 184). You can select up to three switch-on times using the operating system (5 page 151). You can switch the auxiliary heating/ ventilation on and off using:
$ $ $
Risk of fire and poisoning

Do not switch on the auxiliary heating:
$ $
Before switching on

You should preferably set the air conditioning to U.
at the filling station in confined spaces with no ventilation, e.g. in the garage
We recommend that you set the left- and right-hand temperatures to 22 C. The auxiliary heating/ventilation adjusts automatically to the temperature set.
the switch on the centre console (5 page 194) the remote control (5 page 194) the operating system (5 page 150)
You could otherwise endanger yourself and others.
i
The auxiliary heating/ventilation can also be switched on manually. Setting it to U gives you an optimum temperature. To call up the HEATER submenu in the operating system, switch on the ignition and press the upper section of the auxiliary heating/ventilation switch for about three seconds.
The auxiliary heating switches off automatically after no more than 50 minutes. You can have this time changed. Visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre, for this purpose.
i
The auxiliary heating/ventilation system ventilates before heating, depending on temperature and weather conditions. This ensures that the temperature required is reached more quickly.
193
Controls in detail
Auxiliary heating/ventilation*
Switching on Using the switch on the centre console The switch is located on the lower section of the centre console.

Red Yellow
Auxiliary heating/ventilation active Auxiliary heating/ventilation preset time activated
Using the remote control The remote control has a maximum range of approximately 300 m. The range may be reduced in the event of:
$ $ $ $
When the ignition is switched on Press upper section 1 of the switch for approximately two seconds. Red indicator lamp 2 in the switch lights up. When the ignition is switched off (key removed)

sources of radio interference solid objects between the transmitter and the vehicle the remote control being in an unsuitable position in relation to the vehicle transmission from enclosed spaces
P54.25-2866-31
i
You can use a second remote control for your vehicle. Please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for further information.
Press upper section 1 of the switch. Red indicator lamp 2 in the switch lights up.
1 Auxiliary heating/ventilation on/off 2 Indicator lamp (red) 3 Indicator lamp (yellow)
194
Controls in detail
Auxiliary heating/ventilation*
i
The indicator lamp on the remote control tells you: P83.70-3797-31 aus R230
$
Switching off Using the switch on the centre console

whether a signal is being transmitted to the auxiliary heating/ventilation: The radio connection is interrupted if the indicator lamp on the remote control:
$
Press and hold the switch for longer than two seconds. The red indicator lamp in the switch goes out. The auxiliary heating/ventilation is off.
1 Indicator lamp (red/green) 2 OFF 3 ON

flashes in green when you switch on the auxiliary heating/ ventilation flashes in red when you switch off the auxiliary heating/ ventilation
Using the remote control

Press the OFF button. Indicator lamp 1 lights up in red briefly. The red indicator lamp in the switch on the centre console (5 page 194) goes out. The auxiliary heating/ventilation is off.
Press the ON button. Indicator lamp 1 lights up in green briefly. The red indicator lamp in the switch on the centre console (5 page 194) lights up in red. The auxiliary heating/ ventilation is active.
Repeat the process in this case. Change your location and move closer to the vehicle if required.
195
Controls in detail
Heater booster system*
Only on vehicles fitted with a diesel engine. The heater booster system heats up the vehicle interior quickly while the engine is in its warm-up phase. It cuts in as required. You can control the heater booster system using the operating system. To save diesel, you can switch off the heater booster using:
$
Switch The switch is located on the lower section of the centre console.
Switching off

Press upper section 1 of the switch. Indicator lamp 2 in the switch lights up. The heater booster system remains switched off.
P54.25-2853-31
Priming for automatic cut-in

the operating system (5 page 153) the switch on the centre console. 1 Heater booster system off 2 Indicator lamp 3 Primed for automatic cut-in
Press lower section 3 of the switch. Indicator lamp 2 in the switch goes out. The heater booster system is primed and cuts in as required.
or
$
196
Controls in detail
Water separator* Water separator*
The water separator indicator lamp is located on the centre console. When you switch on the ignition, indicator lamp 1 lights up for one second (function check) and then goes out again. The water separator must be serviced if:
$
Visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, as soon as possible.
!
If you continue to drive for a long period of time with indicator lamp 1 lit, this could lead to engine damage. Damage resulting from this will not be covered by the vehicle's warranty.
indicator lamp 1 does not go out after the ignition is switched on indicator lamp 1 lights up while you are driving Environmental note
P54.32-2172 -31
1 Indicator lamp
Dispose of service products in an environmentally-responsible manner.
197
Controls in detail
Open-air
Side windows The side windows can be opened and closed electrically. The switches are located on the respective doors. Using the switches on the driver's door you can:
$ $
Risk of injury
G
P54.00-2362-31
Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close a side window. If danger threatens, release the switch and open the side window. Remove the key from the ignition lock and take it with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could be injured. Disable the switches for the rear power windows if children are travelling in the rear compartment.
open and close all side windows disable the switches for the rear power windows* (child-proof locks)
Switches on the driver's door
1 Disabling switch (rear power windows*) 2 Opens/closes front left window 3 Opens/closes front right window 4 Opens/closes rear right* window 5 Opens/closes rear left* window
198
Controls in detail
Open-air
Opening

Closing

Make sure that the ignition is switched on. Press the switch as far as the pressure point. Each window will open all the while you press on the switch.
Make sure that the ignition is switched on. Pull the switch. Each window will close all the while you pull on the switch.
Disabling the switches for the rear power windows* (child-proof locks)
P54.25-3460-31
or

i
You can also open and close the side windows using the remote control (5 page 85).

Press the switch beyond the pressure point and then release it. The side window opens automatically until you press or pull the switch again.
Slide switch 1 to the right so that the 7 symbol becomes visible. The switches for the rear power windows* are disabled.
199
Controls in detail
Open-air
i
You can also open and close the rear side windows using the switches on the driver's door. Sliding sunroof* Risk of injury
i
When the sliding sunroof is open, resonance noises other than the usual airflow noises can be produced in the vehicle interior as a result of minimal pressure variations. Change the position of the sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises.
The switch is located on the overhead control panel.
P54.25-2869-31
Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you open and close the sunroof. Remove the key from the ignition lock and take it with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could be injured.
1 To open 2 To close 3 To raise 4 To lower and close

200
Controls in detail
Open-air
Opening

Closing

Cabriolet soft top For safety reasons, you can only open and close the soft top while the vehicle is stationary. Risk of accident
Press the switch to 1 and hold it. The sliding sunroof continues opening for as long as you press the switch in direction 1.
Press the switch towards 2 and hold it. The sliding sunroof will close all the while you press the switch towards 2.
or

Press the switch beyond the pressure point towards 1 and then release it. The sliding sunroof opens automatically until you press or pull the switch again.
Raising

Press the switch towards 3 and hold it until the desired position is reached.
Lowering and closing

Press the switch towards 4 and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
Never lock or unlock the soft top while the vehicle is in motion. Make sure that the soft top is locked while the vehicle is in motion. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. The soft top must either be completely open or closed when you are driving. When the soft top is fully open or closed, it will not move if pushed or pulled.
201
Controls in detail
Open-air
$
Risk of injury
Make sure that nobody can become trapped or injured by moving parts such as the soft top frame as you open or close the soft top. Release the soft top switch if danger threatens. The soft top mechanism stops immediately.
the luggage compartment is only loaded up to the height of the luggage compartment cover the luggage compartment cover is not forced upwards by the load there is nothing on top of the luggage compartment cover no roof rack is fitted the soft top is not dirty or wet the outside temperature is above 15 C the soft top material is not frozen the vehicle is not standing at a steep angle, e.g. on rough terrain
Opening Before opening the soft top, make sure that the zip fasteners are closed and the quick-release locks are secure (5 page 90).
$ $ $ $ $ $ $
!
When opening and closing the soft top, make sure that:
$ $
P77.00-2102-31
the tonneau cover* is not attached to the opened soft top there is sufficient clearance to allow the soft top to be swung upwards and opened completely
You could otherwise damage the softtop material, the soft-top window or the soft-top mechanism.
1 Left-hand release lever 2 Right-hand release lever
202
Controls in detail
Open-air

Move the selector lever to position P. Apply the parking brake. Make sure that the ignition is switched on. Fold the sun visors down. Swing release lever 1 to the left until the warning sounds. Swing release lever 2 to the right. The soft top is unlocked. 3 To open 4 To close

Closing

Move the selector lever to position P. Apply the parking brake. Make sure that the ignition is switched on. Fold the sun visors down.
P54.25-2870-31

The soft-top switch is located on the overhead control panel.
Press the soft-top switch in the direction of arrow 3 until the soft top is fully open and the warning stops. Swing release levers 1 and 2 back to their original position.
P77.00-2142-31
203
Controls in detail
Open-air

Swing release lever 1 to the left until the warning sounds. Swing release lever 2 to the right. Press the soft-top switch in the direction of arrow 4 until the soft top comes to a halt above the windscreen.
Using handle 5, pull the soft top downwards until you hear at least one release lever engage. Swing this release lever back to its original position. Swing the second release lever back to its original position. The warning will stop.
Draught stop* Risk of accident

Remove the draught stop if visibility is impaired or when driving in the dark. It may otherwise impair your view to the rear. Make sure that the draught stop is correctly engaged in the mountings. Do not drive with the draught stop fitted when the rear seat is occupied. Do not place any objects on the installed draught stop.
i
P77.00-2104-31 If the soft top does not close automatically, you can close it manually (5 page 354). Avoid frequent opening and closing of the soft top. This drains the vehicle's battery.
5 Handle
The draught stop is a wind protection device to use when driving with the soft top open. It is located in its own bag behind the rear seat.
204
Controls in detail
Open-air
Installing
P77.00-2106-31 P77.00-2105-31
P77.00-2107-31
1 Bag with zip fastener 2 Draught stop

Hook draught-stop rail 2 onto the vehicle's roll-over bar.
3 Mounting rod 4 Retainer

Take draught stop 2 out of bag 1.
Place both sides of mounting rod 3 on side-trim retainer 4. Press both sides of mounting rod 3 into retainer 4 until they engage audibly.
205
Controls in detail
Open-air
Removing

Tonneau cover* The tonneau cover protects the open Cabriolet soft top from the effects of bad weather and from dirt. It is located in its own bag in the luggage compartment. Securing

Pull both sides of mounting rod 3 out of retainer 4. Unhook draught stop rail 2 from the roll-over bar.
P77.00-2108-31
!
Put the draught stop away in the bag provided. By doing this, you can avoid damaging the draught stop and any load you have in the vehicle.
Remove the rear-seat head restraints (5 page 96). Take the tonneau cover out of the bag in the luggage compartment. Unfold the tonneau cover and lay it over the open soft top. 1 Backrest 2 Securing hook

Attach mounting hooks 2 on both sides of rear-seat backrest 1.
206
Controls in detail
Open-air

Release tenax buttons 3 by pulling them apart. Press tenax buttons 3 onto the corresponding pins on the vehicle. Press knobs 4 onto the corresponding pins on the vehicle. Press quick release locks 5 into the corresponding bore holes on the tailgate until they lock in place.
Removing

Turn quick-release locks 5 anti-clockwise and pull them out. Loosen knobs 4. Release tenax buttons 3 by pulling. Unhook retaining hooks 2. Fold up the tonneau cover and stow it in the bag in the luggage compartment.
P77.00-2109-31

3 Tenax buttons 4 Knob 5 Quick-release lock
207
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Your vehicle's driving systems are described on the following pages:
$ $
Cruise control Cruise control maintains the vehicle's speed for you. Use cruise control if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can select the following speeds:
$ $
Risk of accident
Cruise control and Speedtronic for controlling the vehicle's speed Ultrasound reversing aid* which offers assistance with parking and manoeuvring
Cruise control cannot take account of road and traffic conditions. Always pay attention to the traffic conditions when cruise control is activated. Cruise control is only an aid designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time.
The ABS, BAS, 4-ETS and ESP driving safety systems are described in the "Safety" section (5 page 71).
for vehicles with petrol engine any speed above 32 km/h for vehicles with diesel engine any speed above 40 km/h.
208
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Cruise control lever You can operate the following using the cruise control lever:
$ $
Risk of accident
Do not use cruise control:
$
in road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed (e.g. in heavy traffic or winding roads). You could otherwise cause an accident on slippery road surfaces. The drive wheels could lose their grip as a result of braking or accelerating and the vehicle could skid if visibility is poor, e.g. in fog, heavy rain or snow
Cruise control Variable Speedtronic
P54.25-2886-31
i
The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left of the steering wheel. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever displays which system you have selected:
$ $
Cruise control LIM indicator lamp off Variable Speedtronic LIM indicator lamp on
1 To store the current speed or a higher speed 2 To store the current speed or a lower speed 3 To switch off cruise control 4 To resume the last speed stored 5 To switch between cruise control and Speedtronic 6 LIM indicator lamp
209
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Selecting cruise control Storing the current speed

Resuming a stored speed Risk of accident
Accelerate/decelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. Press the cruise control lever briefly up or down. Release the accelerator pedal. The current speed is stored.
P54.25-3941-31
Only call up the stored speed if you know what that speed is and whether it is suitable for the prevailing road and traffic conditions. Sudden acceleration or braking could otherwise endanger yourself or others.
i
1 LIM indicator lamp 2 To select cruise control

Check whether cruise control is activated. If this is the case, LIM indicator lamp 1 will not be lit. If this is not the case, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 2. LIM indicator lamp 1 in the cruise control lever goes out. Cruise control is selected.
Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill or downhill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. P54.25-3936-31
1 To resume a stored speed
210
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Press the cruise control lever briefly in the direction of arrow 1. Release the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is set to the last speed stored.
Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored.
Press the cruise control lever towards 1 until the required speed has been reached. Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored.
i
Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Setting a lower speed
Setting a higher speed
i
If you decelerate the vehicle using the cruise control lever, the automatic transmission changes down if the braking effect is too slow.
P54.25-3937-31
P54.25-3938-31 1 To set a higher speed

Push the cruise control lever towards 1 until the required speed has been reached. 1 To set a lower speed
211
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Fine adjustment in increments of 1 km/h Deactivating cruise control or

Press the cruise control lever briefly in the direction of arrow 1. Cruise control is deactivated. The last speed stored remains stored.
P54.25-3940-31 P54.25-3939-31
or

Press the cruise control lever briefly in the direction of arrow 2. Cruise control is deactivated. Variable Speedtronic is selected. LIM indicator lamp in the cruise control lever is lit. or
1 1 km/h faster 2 1 km/h slower Faster

1 To deactivate cruise control 2 To deactivate cruise control, to Speedtronic There are various ways of deactivating cruise control:

Move the selector lever to N while the vehicle is in motion (5 page 166).
Press the cruise control lever briefly in the direction of arrow 1.
Apply the brakes. Cruise control is deactivated.
i
The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine.
Slower

Press the cruise control lever briefly in the direction of arrow 2.
212
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Variable Speedtronic Variable Speedtronic helps you to remain below a set speed, e.g. in built-up areas where the speed limits change frequently. Risk of accident
i
The speed indicated in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed limit set. You can set the unit for the speed display using the operating system (5 page 144). You can operate the following using the cruise control lever:
$ $
The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever displays which system you have selected:
$ $
Cruise control LIM indicator lamp off Variable Speedtronic LIM indicator lamp on
Speedtronic is only an aid designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time.
i
When the engine is running, you can limit the vehicle's speed to any speed above 30 km/h.
Cruise control Variable Speedtronic
The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left of the steering wheel (5 page 209).
213
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Selecting variable Speedtronic Risk of accident Storing the current speed
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed limit set.
P54.25-3941-31
Only use variable Speedtronic if you are sure that you will not have to accelerate suddenly to a speed above that stored as the speed limit. You could otherwise cause an accident. You can then only exceed the stored speed limit when you deactivate variable Speedtronic, e.g. if you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown).
P54.25-3939-31
1 LIM indicator lamp 2 To select variable Speedtronic

Check whether variable Speedtronic is selected. LIM indicator lamp 1 must then light up. If this is not the case, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 2. LIM indicator lamp 1 lights up. Speedtronic is selected.
1 To store the speed rounded up to the next multiple of 10 km/h 2 To store the speed rounded down to the nearest multiple of 10 km/h
214
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Press the cruise control lever briefly in the direction of arrow 1. The speed displayed is stored. Speedtronic rounds the speed up to the next multiple of 10 km/h.
i
Speedtronic may be unable to prevent the speed limit from being exceeded on downhill gradients. In this case:
$ $ $
Resuming a stored speed
or

Press the cruise control lever briefly in the direction of arrow 2. The speed displayed is stored. Speedtronic rounds the speed down to the next multiple of 10 km/h.
you hear a signal the indicator lamp in the speedometer flashes you will see the LIMIT EXCEEDED message in the multi-function display
P54.25-3936-31
1 To resume a stored speed

The stored speed is shown in the multifunction display. The indicator lamps in the cruise control lever and in the speedometer (5 page 19) light up.
Apply the brakes yourself if necessary.
Press the cruise control lever briefly in the direction of arrow 1. If the road speed is no more than 30 km/h above the stored speed limit, Speedtronic will adjust to the last speed stored.
215
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Adjustments in 10 km/h increments Lower speed

Higher speed

Press the cruise control lever briefly in the direction of arrow 2. Press and hold the cruise control lever towards 2 until the required speed has been reached.
or P54.25-3939-31

or

Fine adjustment in 1 km/h increments 1 To adjust the speed: 10 km/h faster 2 To adjust the speed: 10 km/h slower Higher speed

P54.25-3936-31
or

1 Fine adjustment: 1 km/h faster
216
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Deactivating variable Speedtronic There are various ways of deactivating variable Speedtronic:

Variable Speedtronic is deactivated automatically:

$ $
Press the cruise control lever briefly in the direction of arrow 1. Variable Speedtronic is deselected. The set speed limit remains stored.
if you depress the accelerator beyond the pressure point (kickdown) and at the same time your current speed differs from the set speed by no more than 20 km/h
P54.25-3940-31 or

Press the cruise control lever briefly in the direction of arrow 5. Variable Speedtronic is deselected. The indicator lamps in the cruise control lever and in the speedometer go out. Cruise control is selected.
Risk of accident
1 To deactivate variable Speedtronic 2 To deactivate variable Speedtronic, to select cruise control
You cannot deactivate variable Speedtronic by braking.
217
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Ultrasound reversing aid* The ultrasound reversing aid is an electronic parking aid. It visually and audibly informs you of the distance between the rear area of your vehicle and an obstacle. The ultrasound reversing aid is automatically activated if the ignition is switched on and reverse gear is engaged. The ultrasound reversing aid monitors the rear area of your vehicle using four sensors in the rear bumper.
Risk of accident
G
P88.20-2554-31
The ultrasound reversing aid is only intended to assist the driver and is unable to detect every obstacle. The system is not designed to relieve the driver of the need to pay attention. You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others.
1 Sensors
Risk of injury
Make sure that no persons or animals are in the manoeuvring range. They could otherwise be injured.
218
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Range of the sensors The sensors must be free from dirt, ice and slush, otherwise they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly (5 page 289), taking care not to scratch or damage them.
!
Pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors when parking, e.g. flower pots or trailer tow bars. The ultrasound reversing aid does not detect such objects at close range. You could otherwise damage the vehicle or the objects. Sources of ultrasound waves, e.g. a lorry's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill, could interfere with the ultrasound reversing aid's operation.
P54.65-2519-31
P54.65-2518-31
Minimum distance The minimum distance between the sensors and the obstacle is 30 cm. If there is an obstacle within this range, all the segments in the warning display will flash and you will hear a warning signal. If your vehicle's distance to the obstacle falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be displayed.
Centre Corners
150 cm 100 cm
219
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning display The warning display shows the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display is divided into two green, two yellow and two red segments. It is operational when you hear a signal and all the segments have lit up briefly. One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. When the fourth segment is lit, you will hear an intermittent warning, and when the sixth segment is lit, you will hear a constant warning lasting a maximum of three seconds. You have reached the minimum distance. Station wagon The warning display is located in the rear compartment near the rear door.
P54.65-2520-31
Cabriolet The warning display is located on the frontpassenger side at the top on the roll-over bar.
220
Controls in detail
Features Features
Stowage compartments Risk of injury Glove compartment Opening the glove compartment

G
P68.00-3004-31
Pull handle 3 and fold the cover downwards.
Luggage nets are not strong enough to secure heavy objects. Do not carry hard or heavy objects inside the vehicle unless they are properly secured. They may otherwise be thrown around and injure someone if you brake sharply, change direction suddenly or have an accident. The stowage compartments must be closed when you are storing items in them. The items could otherwise fall out when you apply the brakes.
Closing the glove compartment

Fold the cover upwards and push against it until it clicks into place.
i
1 To unlock 2 To lock 3 Handle You can unlock 1 and lock 2 the glove compartment using the mechanical key element in the remote control (5 page 82). The opened glove compartment is lit when the ignition is switched on. There is a cup holder in the glove compartment (5 page 224).
221
Controls in detail
Features
Armrest There is a shallow stowage tray under the armrest with a deeper stowage compartment beneath it (telephone holder*). They can both be opened separately. Opening the stowage tray

Press button 1 and lift the armrest.
Risk of injury
i
Telephone cards, for example, can be stored in the lid of the armrest. Opening the stowage compartment

Keep the cup holders closed while the vehicle is moving. Do not place anything in the bottle holder while the vehicle is in motion. You could otherwise be injured by objects being thrown around if you:
$ $ $
Press button 2 and lift the armrest. The armrest is raised together with the stowage tray, making the stowage compartment below accessible.
brake sharply change direction suddenly have an accident
P68.00-3003-31
1 To open the stowage tray 2 To open the stowage compartment 3 Stowage compartment in the centre console
Opening the stowage compartment in the centre console

Only use the cup holder for sealable containers of the correct size. The drinks could otherwise spill. Avoid hot drinks. You may otherwise scald yourself.
Push the cover back by handle 3. You can also use this stowage compartment as a cup holder.
222
Controls in detail
Features
Ruffled pockets/luggage net Risk of injury There is a ruffled pocket on the back of each front seat. There is a luggage net in the bottom right of the cockpit.
Do not transport heavy, hard, fragile or sharp-edged objects in the ruffled pockets or in the luggage net. Objects must not protrude over the top of the ruffled pockets or the luggage net. Objects that have not been secured could otherwise cause you injury.
P68.00-3240-31
P68.50-2231-31
1 Ruffled pockets
1 Luggage net
223
Controls in detail
Features
Cup holders Risk of injury Cup holders in the glove compartment Cup holders on the centre console
G
P68.10-2767-31 P68.00-3005-31
Keep the cup holders closed while the vehicle is moving. Do not place anything in the bottle holder while the vehicle is in motion. You could otherwise be injured by objects being thrown around if you:
$ $ $
brake sharply change direction suddenly have an accident

Open the glove compartment (5 page 221).
Only use the cup holder for sealable containers of the correct size. The drinks could otherwise spill. Avoid hot drinks. You may otherwise scald yourself.
1 Upper cup holder* 2 Fixture* 3 Lower cup holder* Upper cup holder*

Insert cup holder 1 in fixture* 2 next to the armrest (arrow).
224
Controls in detail
Features
Lower cup holder*

Cup holders in the rear compartment*
Ashtray and cigarette lighter Risk of injury and fire
Fold cup holder 3 upwards to the stop (arrow).
!
Make sure that the cup holder is folded down before moving the seat forwards, otherwise you could damage the seat and the cup holder. P68.00-3007-31
Only hold the hot cigarette lighter by its knob. You could otherwise burn yourself. Remove the cigarette lighter if children are travelling with you. They could injure themselves on a hot cigarette lighter or start a fire.
i
You can also use the stowage compartment in the centre console (5 page 222) as a cup holder.
i
You can also use the cigarette lighter socket for accessories with a maximum power consumption of 180 watts. When the engine has been switched off, it is possible for the battery to discharge if the sockets are used for long periods.
225
Controls in detail
Features
Ashtray and cigarette lighter at the front in the centre console The ashtray and cigarette lighter are under a cover. Opening the ashtray

Removing the ashtray insert Risk of injury
Press cover 3 and then release it. The ashtray and cigarette lighter slide out.
Closing the ashtray

Switch off the engine and apply the parking brake before removing the ashtray insert. You could otherwise move the selector lever and unintentionally set the vehicle in motion.

Press down on cover 3 until it engages.
P68.20-2660-31
Move the selector lever to N. This will give you more space to remove the insert.
1 Ashtray 2 Cigarette lighter 3 Cover
226
Controls in detail
Features

Press cigarette lighter 2 in. The cigarette lighter will pop out automatically as soon as the heating element is red-hot.
Opening

Fold cover 1 down in the direction of the arrow.
P68.20-2661-31 Ashtray in the rear passenger compart ment* There is an ashtray in the side of each of the rear doors. 4 Release button 5 Insert

Closing

Fold the cover up completely.
Removing the ashtray insert

Press retaining lug 2 (arrow) and pull insert 3 upwards and out.
Press release button 4 to the right so that the insert disengages. Pull insert 5 upwards and out. P68.00-3008-31
Cigarette lighter

Switch on the ignition. 1 Cover 2 Retaining lug 3 Insert
227
Controls in detail
Features
Floormats Risk of accident Telephone*
Risk of accident
This jeopardises the operating safety of the vehicle and therefore your own safety. Furthermore, high levels of electromagnetic radiation can cause damage to your health. Therefore, have the exterior aerial installed only at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Make sure that floormats or carpets in the driver's footwell do not obstruct the pedals. The floormats must always be properly secured using the eyelets and retaining pins. Check that they are secure before starting your journey and adjust them if necessary. A floormat which is not properly secured could slip and get caught between the pedals in the event of sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. You will then not be able to brake or accelerate. This could lead to an accident or injury.
Only use the telephone when road and traffic conditions permit. If you are not using the hands-free system, stop the vehicle in an area designated for using telephones. If the mobile phone is operated from within the vehicle:
$ $ $
without an exterior aerial without a reflection-free exterior aerial installed with an incorrectly-installed exterior aerial
a malfunction may occur in the vehicle's electronics.
228
Controls in detail
Features
Hands-free system* The microphone for the hands-free system and the Linguatronic* system is on the roof on the left. Mobile phone* version with code 852 or code 854 (telephone bracket* with spiral cable) Inserting the mobile phone in the tele phone bracket on the armrest

i
You can use all functions of the Nokia 6310i only if the relevant control unit for the Nokia 6310i has been installed in your vehicle. The following mobile phones can also be used in this telephone bracket with certain restrictions: Nokia 5110, Nokia 5130, Nokia 6110, Nokia 6130, Nokia 6150, Nokia 6210, Nokia 6310
Open the stowage compartment in the armrest (5 page 222).
P82.00-2196-31
P82.70-4160-31
Microphone
Remove the round cap in the back of 55 your mobile phone.
229
Controls in detail
Features
The battery is charged depending on its current charge status and the position of the key in the ignition lock. The charging process is shown in the display on the mobile phone.
P82.70-4401-31
P82.70-4403-31
i
Depending on the mobile phone setting, either the phone book stored on the SIM card or the phone book stored in the mobile phone is read. You can make a call using buttons and on the multi-function steering wheel. Other mobile phone functions can be controlled via the operating system (5 page 159).
Press the bracket down 1 briefly. Cradle 2 folds up. Insert the lower part of the mobile phone into lugs 3 in bracket 4.
Press the mobile phone down 5. Cradle 2 folds down. Press the mobile phone down further 5 until it engages at the sides of bracket 6. The mobile phone is connected to the hands-free system and the multi-function steering wheel.
230
Controls in detail
Features
i
When you remove the key from the ignition lock, the mobile phone remains switched on for approximately ten minutes (run-on time). If you make a call during this time, the mobile phone will be switched off approximately ten minutes after you have hung up. You can change the run-on time by means of an additional phone book entry. Enter "Nachlaufzeit" for the name and a figure between "1" and "30" for the number. If you do not enter a figure, or you enter an invalid figure, a run-on time of ten minutes will still apply. You will find details of how to make an entry in the phone book in the mobile phone Operating Instructions.
Own number sending: The hands-free system does not recognise whether own number sending is enabled or disabled in the mobile phone. This means that your number will always be displayed to the opposite party. You can enable or disable own number sending by making an additional entry in the phone book stored on the SIM card: Enter "CALLID" for the name and "0" or "1" for the number. Your number:
$ $
Making a call using the telephone bracket The telephone bracket contains a fully operational receiver with a loudspeaker and a microphone. You can remove the mobile phone together with the telephone bracket and make a call in this way.
P82.70-4403-31
will not be shown if "0" is entered will be shown if "1" is entered

You will find details of how to make an entry in the phone book in the mobile phone Operating Instructions.
Press briefly on mobile phone 5. Cradle 2 folds up. Remove bracket 6 and the mobile phone from cradle 2.
231
Controls in detail
Features
Replacing the telephone bracket Removing the mobile phone from the telephone bracket
P82.70-4404-31 P82.70-4405-31 P82.70-4402-31
Bracket 6 contains a fully operational receiver (arrows) which you can use to make a call.

Press bracket 6 along with the mobile phone into cradle 2. Press on the top of the mobile phone in the direction of arrow 5 until cradle 2 engages.
i
The mobile phone's receiver function is deactivated while the phone is in bracket 6. You can then only make a call via the receiver in bracket 6.
Press briefly on the top of the mobile phone in the direction of arrow 5. Cradle 2 folds up. Press release button 7 and remove the mobile phone towards the front from the telephone bracket. Press bracket 6 in the direction of arrow 5 until cradle 2 engages again.
232
Controls in detail
Features
Mobile phone* version with code 386 or code 388 (telephone bracket* without spiral cable)
i
For some mobile phones there are other suitable telephone brackets which can be engaged in the Nokia telephone bracket contact (5 page 235). You can obtain these telephone brackets from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Inserting the mobile phone in the tele phone bracket on the armrest
!
You cannot remove the mobile phone together with the telephone bracket.
i
You can use all functions of the Nokia 6310i only if the relevant control unit for the Nokia 6310i has been installed in your vehicle. The following mobile phones can also be used in this telephone bracket:
$ $
P82.70-4160-31
Nokia 6210 Nokia 6310
i
When the mobile phone is inserted in the telephone bracket, you can only make a call using the hands-free system.

Please also observe the additional Operating Instructions for the Nokia 6210 (5 page 236).
Remove the round cap on the back of 55 your mobile phone.
233
Controls in detail
Features
The mobile phone is connected to the hands-free system and the multi-function steering wheel. P82.70-4637-31 The battery is charged depending on its current charge status and the position of the key in the ignition lock. The charging process is shown in the display on the mobile phone.
i
When you remove the key from the ignition lock, the mobile phone remains switched on for approximately ten minutes (run-on time). If you make a call during this time, the telephone will be switched off approximately ten minutes after you have hung up. Run-on time: You can change the run-on time by means of an additional phone book entry. Enter "Nachlaufzeit" for the name and a figure between "1" and "30" for the number. If you do not enter a figure, or you enter an invalid figure, a run-on time of ten minutes will still apply. You will find details of how to make an entry in the phone book in the mobile phone Operating Instructions.
1 To engage the mobile phone (arrow) 2 Lugs 3 Telephone bracket

i
First the phone book stored on the SIM card is read. If there is sufficient memory space remaining, the entries in the phone book stored on the mobile phone are also read. You can make a call using buttons and on the multi-function steering wheel. Other mobile phone functions can be controlled via the operating system (5 page 159).
Insert the lower part of the mobile phone into lugs 2 in telephone bracket 3. Press the mobile phone down in the direction of arrow 1 until it engages in telephone bracket 3.
234
Controls in detail
Features
Own number sending: The hands-free system does not recognise whether own number sending is enabled or disabled in the mobile phone. This means that your number will always be displayed to the opposite party. You can enable or disable own number sending by making an additional entry in the phone book stored on the SIM card: Enter "CALLID" for the name and "0" or "1" for the number. Your number:
$ $
Removing the mobile phone from the telephone bracket
Replacing the telephone bracket
i
For some mobile phones you can engage other suitable telephone brackets in the Nokia telephone bracket contact. Removing the telephone bracket
P82.70-4638-31
1 Release button 2 Telephone bracket

will not be shown if "0" is entered will be shown if "1" is entered
P82.70-3368-31
You will find details of how to make an entry in the phone book in the mobile phone Operating Instructions.
Press release button 1 and remove the mobile phone towards the front from telephone bracket 2.
Illustration of a Nokia telephone bracket
1 Contact 2 Release button 3 Telephone bracket
55
235
Controls in detail
Features

Press release button 2 and remove telephone bracket 3 in a downwards direction.

Insert telephone bracket 3 in recesses 2 on contact 1. Slide telephone bracket 3 forwards until it engages.
Mercedes-Benz telematic services Mercedes-Benz telematics service are:

$ $
DynAPS* (dynamic route guidance) TeleAid*
Installing the telephone bracket
Additional Operating Instructions for the Nokia 6210 You can only use all the functions of the Nokia 6210 if the mobile phone uses software version "V 05.02" or a more recent version. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use software version "V 05.56".

The Mercedes-Benz telematics services allow the service centre to establish a connection with your vehicle. If you have registered with Mercedes-Benz telematics services, the service centre sends free, regular text messages (SMS) to your mobile phone* or to the permanentlyinstalled telephone*.
P82.70-4640-31
Press the following sequence of buttons to display the software version: *#0000#
Illustration of a Nokia telephone bracket
i
If you use prepaid cards, costs will be incurred for the SMS messages. These will be deducted from the credit on your card.
1 Contact 2 Recesses 3 Telephone bracket
i
If necessary, you can update the software at a Nokia service centre.
236
Controls in detail
Features
DynAPS* (dynamic route guidance) Your navigation system* adapts the route guidance to the current traffic situation. This helps you to avoid traffic jams and reach your destination more quickly. TeleAid* You can only use the TeleAid service if you have a permanently-installed telephone*. You will find further information about how to operate your telephone in the separate telephone Operating Instructions. Select service mode if:
$ $
Enter the following sequence of characters in the telephone:

*#4610#
Service mode is selected. TeleAid has various functions:

$
i
You can only use DynAPS in vehicles with:
$ $
a permanently-installed telephone* a mobile phone* version code 852 or code 854 (telephone bracket* with spiral cable)
the vehicle battery is to be disconnected for more than ten days the vehicle battery is discharged
The internal TeleAid battery will otherwise discharge and you will have to have it replaced at your own expense at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Emergency call system The system automatically makes an emergency call if you have a serious accident in certain European countries. You can also initiate an emergency call yourself by pressing the emergency call button (5 page 239). The system transmits data regarding the vehicle's position and the extent of the accident to the emergency service centre and establishes a connection with this centre.
237
Controls in detail
Features
$
Roadside assistance When you press the roadside assistance (breakdown service) button on the telephone*, the system transmits the current vehicle position and the vehicle data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (CAC). The CAC then establishes a voice connection with your vehicle. You will find further information in the separate telephone operating instructions. MB Info This service assists you with any questions about your vehicle. You will find further information in the separate telephone operating instructions.
Emergency call system It is only possible to make an emergency call is you turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. The indicator lamp in the emergency call button (5 page 239) lights up for approximately five seconds. An emergency call is initiated automatically:
$ $ $
The following messages appear in the multi-function display:

EMERGENCY CALL CONNECTING CALL EMERGENCY CALL CALL CONNECTED
You will hear an announcement when the emergency service centre has received your emergency call.

when an airbag is triggered if there is a severe rear-end collision if the vehicle overturns
Wait until a connection is established with the emergency service centre. You can now make your emergency.
The indicator lamp in the emergency call button flashes until the emergency call is finished.
238
Controls in detail
Features
i
You cannot make another call using the telephone* while connected to the emergency service centre. If the indicator lamp lights up constantly without a voice connection having first been established, this means that the system has been unable to transmit an emergency call. The following message appears in the multi-function display:
EMERGENCY CALL CALL FAILED
Prerequisites
$ $ $ $ $ $ $
Initiating an emergency call manually The emergency call system is a public system. Misuse is a punishable offence. The emergency call button is located in the overhead control panel.
TeleAid is available in the country you are in. A Mercedes-Benz Service Centre has commissioned TeleAid. You have a contract with a telephone provider and the TeleAid service. You have a valid telephone card. You have a valid PIN for your telephone card. You are authorised to use TeleAid. The relevant mobile phone network is available (with SMS service). In Germany this is D1 or D2. The vehicle can receive the GPS signals. The emergency call system is operational.
You must then initiate your own rescue measures.
P82.95-2365-31
$ $
1 Cover 2 Emergency call button
55
239
Controls in detail
Features

Briefly press cover 1 on the emergency call button on the overhead control panel. The cover opens. Press emergency call button 2. The indicator lamp in emergency call button 2 flashes. You will hear an announcement when the emergency service centre has received your emergency call.
Garage door opener* The integrated remote control in the rearview mirror may be used to open and close up to three different door systems. The transmitter buttons can be programmed.
P68.05-2060-31
i
The garage door opener is only available for certain countries. Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned. It may not be possible to operate some garage door opening systems with the integrated remote control. You can obtain more detailed information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Integrated remote control in the rear-view mirror
Wait until a connection is established with the emergency service centre. You can now make your emergency call.
1 Indicator lamp 2 Transmitter button 3 Transmitter button 4 Transmitter button
When you have finished the emergency call:

Replace the cover on the emergency call button.
240
Controls in detail
Features
Risk of injury
i
The indicator lamp flashes as soon as the first transmitter button is programmed. If this button has already been programmed, the indicator lamp only begins to flash after 20 seconds.

Release the transmitter button on the integrated and transportable remote control.
Only press a transmitter button on the remote control if there are no people or objects present within the sweep of the garage door. People could otherwise be injured as the door moves.
i
If your garage door opening system works with a rolling code: Synchronise the remote control integrated in the rear-view mirror with the garage door remote control after programming. You will find further information in the garage door opening system operating instructions, e.g. the sections on "Synchronising the transmitter" or "Registering a new transmitter".
Keep pressing the transmitter button. Point the transportable garage door remote control and the transmitter at the left-hand side of the rear-view mirror. Press and hold the transmitter button on the garage door remote control until indicator lamp 1 flashes several times each second. Programming has been successful.
Programming the remote control

Switch on the ignition. Press and hold transmitter button 2, 3 or 4 on the integrated remote control. Indicator lamp 1 starts to flash after a short while. It flashes approximately once a second.

241
Controls in detail
Features
Opening/closing the garage door The integrated remote control adopts the function of the garage door remote control once it has been programmed. You should therefore also read the garage door system Operating Instructions.

Clearing the remote control memory

Sockets Socket on the centre console The socket is located at the rear of the centre console.
Switch on the ignition. Press and hold buttons 2 and 4 for approximately 20 seconds until indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. The memory is cleared.
Switch on the ignition. Press the transmitter button in the rear-view mirror which you have programmed to operate this garage door.
i
Clear the remote control memory before you sell the vehicle. P68.20-3034-31
i
The transmitter transmits a signal all the time the transmitter button is being pressed. Transmission is aborted after a maximum of 20 seconds and indicator lamp 1 flashes. Press the transmitter button again if necessary.
Raise the cover and insert the plug.
242
Controls in detail
Features
Socket in the luggage compartment The socket is located on the rear left-hand side of the luggage compartment. Steering wheel heating* The steering wheel heating heats the leather areas of the steering wheel. The lever is on the left of the steering column. Switching on
i
You can use the cigarette lighter socket (5 page 226) for accessories, even if the key has been removed from the ignition. The maximum load for the sockets is 180 W.
P68.00-3633-31 P54.30-6442-31

When the engine has been switched off, the battery may discharge if the sockets are used for long periods. Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (5 page 35). Turn the lever in the direction of arrow 1. The steering wheel is heated. Indicator lamp 3 lights up.
Raise the cover and insert the plug. 1 To switch on 2 To switch off 3 Indicator lamp
243
Controls in detail
Features
Switching off

Turn the lever in the direction of arrow 2. The steering wheel heating is switched off. Indicator lamp 3 goes out.
i
The steering wheel heating does not switch off automatically.
244
Operation
The first 1,500 km Refuelling Engine compartment Tyres and wheels Driving tips Winter driving Driving abroad Trailer towing Service Care
245
Operation
The first 1,500 km
You will find detailed information about operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle in the "Operation" section. If you treat the engine with sufficient care from the very start, it will reward you with excellent performance for a very long period afterwards.
$ $
Use ranges 4, 3, 2 or 1 for slow driving only, for example in mountainous terrain.
You should therefore drive at varying road and engine speeds for the first 1,500 km. Avoid placing a heavy strain on the engine during this time, e.g. by driving at full throttle. Do not exceed 2/3 of the top speed for each gear. Try to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). Do not change down a gear manually in order to brake.
After 1,500 km, you can gradually bring the vehicle up to full road speed and increase the engine speed. Additional notes for AMG vehicles:
$ $
Do not drive faster than 140 km/h during the first 1,500 km. Only run the engine at a maximum speed of 4,500 rpm for short periods of time.
These notes must also be observed if the engine or the axle drive has been replaced on the vehicle.
246
Operation
Refuelling Refuelling
Risk of injury

G
P88.60-2078-31
Open fuel filler flap 1. To do this, press on fuel filler flap 1 (arrow). The fuel filler flap folds out. Turn fuel filler cap 2 anti-clockwise and remove it. Place fuel filler cap 2 in the holder on the inside of fuel filler flap 1. Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. Close fuel filler cap 2 again. To do this, turn it clockwise until it clicks into place. Close fuel filler flap 1. The catch engages.
Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are therefore prohibited when handling fuels. Switch off the auxiliary heating* when refuelling. Do not allow fuel to come into contact with skin or clothing. Your health may be damaged if:
$ $

Illustration example
you spill fuel onto your skin you inhale fuel vapours
1 Fuel filler flap 2 Fuel filler cap

Remove the key from the ignition lock.
The fuel filler flap is located to the rear on the right-hand side when viewed in the direction of travel. When you lock or unlock the vehicle using the key, you automatically lock and unlock the fuel filler flap.
247
Operation
Refuelling
Petrol (EN 228) Premium unleaded petrol with an octane rating of at least 95 RON/85 MON for all petrol engines.
!
The following can lead to increased wear or engine damage:
$ $
!
Leaded petrol damages the catalytic converter and the lambda probe. If you exceed the interval for replacing the spark plugs, this may cause increased wear and engine damage. You may obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
i
You will generally find information on petrol grade on the filling pump. As a very temporary measure, you may also use regular unleaded petrol 91 RON/82.5 MON. This may reduce power and increase fuel consumption. Avoid the use of full throttle.
Using petrol which does not comply with EN 228. Using fuel additives.
The use of non-approved fuels and fuel additives will lead to the limitation of your warranty rights. Leaded petrol You may refuel with leaded petrol in countries where unleaded petrol is not available. This shortens the interval for replacing spark plugs to 20,000 km.

Ask at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre before using leaded petrol.
248
Operation
Refuelling
Diesel (EN 590)
!
The following can lead to increased wear or engine damage:
$ $ $ $ $
Low outside temperatures To prevent operating problems, diesel with improved cold flow qualities is available during the winter months. You can use winter diesel at temperatures down to approximately 20 C without problems. To improve flow properties, it is possible to mix diesel with kerosene and flow improver. The mixing ratio depends on the type of diesel and the outside temperature. However, keep the concentration of flow improver as low as possible.
i
You will generally find information on diesel grade on the filling pump. We recommend having the engine oil changed every 7,500 km in countries where only diesel fuel with a sulphur content exceeding 0.5 percent by weight is available.
Using diesel which does not comply with EN 590 Using marine diesel fuel Using heating oil Using vegetable oil methyl ester (VME) Using fuel additives ("bio-diesel", FAME fuels)
The use of non-approved fuels and fuel additives will lead to the limitation of your warranty rights.
249
Operation
Refuelling !
Do not mix diesel with petrol. This would damage the fuel system. Add a maximum of 50% kerosene or flow improver to the diesel. Only mix diesel with kerosene in a container that has been approved for holding fuels; do not mix them in the fuel tank.

Put the kerosene into the container first, then add the diesel. After a few minutes' driving, the mixture will spread to all parts of the fuel system.
Outside tempera ture 15 C to 23 C 23 C to 30 C Outside tempera ture 25 C to 30 C 30 C to 35 C
Summer diesel 80% 50% Winter diesel 80% 50%
Kerosene
20% 50% Kerosene
Risk of injury
Please note that as a result of adding kerosene the diesel is more highly flammable.
20% 50%
250
Operation
Refuelling
Bleeding the fuel system Vehicles with a diesel engine If the vehicle is driven until the tank is empty, the engine may not start again after refuelling because air could be trapped in the fuel system. In such cases, start the engine around five times after refuelling. If the engine does not start, wait for two minutes and repeat the starting procedure. Do not try to start the engine again if this attempt is unsuccessful. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose, as it has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Vegetable oil methyl ester (V.O.M.E. fuels)* Only models with the special option of the vegetable oil methyl ester specification may be filled up with V.O.M.E. fuels. V.O.M.E. fuels do not attain the same quality as winter diesel. We recommend using standard winter diesel at temperatures below 10 C. If the vehicle has not been used for a long time (more than about two weeks), we recommend that you first refuel with standard diesel fuel and then drive the vehicle for 30 minutes.
251
Operation
Engine compartment
Bonnet Risk of accident
G
P68.00-3010-31 P88.40-2290-31
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. The bonnet could otherwise open.
Opening
!
Make sure that the windscreen wipers are not folded away from the windscreen, otherwise the windscreen wipers or the bonnet may be damaged.
1 Release lever

2 Bonnet catch

Pull release lever 1 located on the cockpit at the bottom left. The bonnet is released.
Raise the bonnet slightly. Pull bonnet catch 2 in the direction of the arrow. Raise the bonnet.
252
Operation
Engine compartment
Closing Risk of injury
Risk of injury
There is a risk of injury if the bonnet is open even if the engine is not running. Parts of the engine can become very hot. To avoid burning yourself, only touch those components specified in the Owner's Manual and observe the notes on the associated risks. The engine has an electronic ignition system which carries a high voltage.
For this reason, never touch the ignition system components (ignition coil, ignition cables, spark plug connections, test socket) if:
$ the engine is running $ the engine is being started $ the ignition is switched on and the en-
Make sure that nobody can be trapped as you close the bonnet.

gine is being cranked by hand The radiator fan can start up automatically, even if the key is removed from the ignition. Keep away from the area of rotation of the fan blades.
Lower the bonnet and let it drop from a height of about 20 cm. The bonnet engages audibly. Check that the bonnet has engaged properly. If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is not properly locked. Open the bonnet again and close it with a little more force.
253
Operation
Engine compartment
Engine oil The vehicle consumes a maximum of 0.8 l of oil per 1,000 km, depending on your driving style. Oil consumption can exceed this if:
$ $
!
Do not use special lubricant additives. They can lead to increased wear and damage of the mechanical assemblies. The use of fuel additives could result in a limitation of your warranty entitlement. You may obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Checking the engine oil level When checking the oil level, the vehicle must:
$ $ $
be standing level be at normal operating temperature have been standing with the engine switched off for at least five minutes
the vehicle is new you often drive at high engine speeds
The engine oil consumption can only be estimated once a lengthy distance has been covered.
Using the operating system

Turn the ignition to position 2 (5 page 35). The standard display appears in the multi-function display (5 page 129).
254
Operation
Engine compartment

Press the k or j button on the multi-function display until the following message appears in the display:
The following messages may appear once the engine oil has been measured:
$ $ $ $
Other messages in the display: The following message is displayed if the engine is at normal operating temperature and there is too much oil: ENGINE OIL
LEVEL REDUCE OIL LEVEL

P54.30-6242-31 Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6242en-31 Franzsisch: P54.30-7439-31 Italienisch: P54.30-7451-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6242sp-31 The ENGINE OIL LEVEL MEASURING NOW! message appears after about three seconds.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL O.K. ADD 1.0 LITRE TO REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL! ADD 1.5 LITRE TO REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL! ADD 2.0 LITRE TO REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL!
Have any excess oil siphoned off.
!
If the oil level is too high, there is a risk of damage to the engine or the catalytic converter. The following message is displayed:
FOR ENGINE OIL LEVEL SWITCH ON IGNITION!

Top up the oil if necessary (5 page 257).
Turn the key in the ignition to position 55 2 (5 page 35).
255
Operation
Engine compartment
If you do not observe the required waiting time, the following message is displayed:
OBSERVE WAITING TIME!

Using the dipstick
Measure again after five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. Measure again after 30 minutes if the engine is not at normal operating temperature.
P18.00-2075-31 P18.00-2074-31
The following message is displayed if the engine is running: ENGINE OIL LEVEL NOT
WHEN ENGINE ON!

G 270 CDI G 320, G 500, G 55 AMG
Switch off the engine and wait for around five minutes with the engine at normal operating temperature before measuring.
1 Dipstick 2 Filler neck
i
Press the k or j button on the multi-function steering wheel if you wish to abort the measuring procedure.
256
Operation
Engine compartment
Topping up the engine oil

Unscrew the cap on filler neck 2. Top up the oil. Make sure that you do not add too much oil.
P18.00-2084-31
P18.00-2061-31 Aus M-Klasse Ba.
!
G 400 CDI

1 Dipstick for G 320, G 500, G 55 AMG, G 400 CDI 2 Dipstick for G 270 CDI

Have any excess oil siphoned off. If the oil level is too high, there is a risk of damage to the engine or the catalytic converter.

Pull out dipstick 1. Wipe it off. Insert it into the dipstick tube to the stop and pull it out again.
The oil level is correct if the oil is between the lower and upper marks on the dipstick. Top up the oil if necessary.
Screw the cap back onto filler neck 2.
55
i
The difference in the quantity of oil between the upper and lower marks on the dipstick is approximately 2 litres.
257
Operation
Engine compartment
Coolant Coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze and corrosion inhibitor. Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is level and the engine has cooled down. Risk of injury You will find further information in the "Technical data" section (5 page 408). Oil level in the automatic transmission There is no need to check the oil level in the automatic transmission. Have any oil loss from the automatic transmission or problems with gear shifts checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Checking the coolant level The expansion tank is in the engine compartment on right-hand side when viewed in the direction of travel.
Environmental note
When topping up the oil, take care not to spill any. Oil must not be allowed to escape into the soil or waterways. You would otherwise be damaging the environment.
G
P20.30-2154-31
The cooling system is pressurised. You should therefore only unscrew the cap once the engine has cooled down. The coolant temperature display must show less than 70 C. You could otherwise be scalded by any hot coolant which escapes.

1 Cap Slowly unscrew cap 1 by about half a turn in the direction of the arrow and allow any excess pressure to escape. Continue turning the cap and remove it.
258
Operation
Engine compartment

The coolant level is correct if:

$
it has reached the mark on the expansion tank when the coolant is cold it is approximately 1.5 cm higher when the coolant is hot
Windscreen washer system, headlamp cleaning system The windscreen washer fluid reservoir is in the engine compartment on the right-hand side when viewed in the direction of travel. It holds around 7.5 litres. The headlamp cleaning system is supplied from the windscreen washer fluid reservoir.
Add windscreen washer concentrate to the washer fluid all year round. Risk of fire
$
Top up the coolant if necessary. Replace the cap and turn it beyond the detent until it clicks three times.
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are therefore prohibited when you are handling windscreen washer concentrate.
You will find further information about coolant in the "Technical data" section (5 page 409).
Use:
$
P20.30-2155-31
a windscreen washer fluid additive, e.g. MB Summerwash, at temperatures above freezing point to prevent smear55 ing
1 Cap
259
Operation
Engine compartment
$
a windscreen washer fluid additive with antifreeze properties, e.g. MB Winterwash, when there is a risk of frost so that the washer fluid does not freeze on the windscreen
Opening the windscreen washer fluid reservoir

!
Only use windscreen washer fluid that is suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Unsuitable windscreen washer fluid may cause damage to the plastic lenses of the headlamps.
Pull cap 1 upwards by the tab.
Mix the washer fluid in a container. Vary the mixing ratio according to the outside temperature (5 page 411).
Closing the windscreen washer fluid reservoir

Press cap 1 onto the filler neck until it clicks fully into place.
260
Operation
Tyres and wheels Tyres and wheels
Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for safety reasons, you only use tyres that have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These tyres are specially suited for use with control systems such as ABS or ESP. If you use other tyres, Mercedes-Benz cannot be held responsible for any damage that may occur. You may obtain information about tyres from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. If you fit tyres other than those approved and recommended by Mercedes-Benz, properties such as handling characteristics, noise emissions and fuel consumption, etc. may be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, dimensional variations and different tyre deformation characteristics could cause the tyres to make contact with the bodywork and axle components. This may result in the tyre or the vehicle being damaged. Retreaded tyres are neither checked nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety. Risk of accident
Only use the wheel sizes stated in the vehicle registration document. If other wheels are fitted:
$ $
the wheel brakes or chassis components could be damaged, for example wheel and tyre clearance is no longer guaranteed
Modification work on the brake system and wheels is not permitted, nor is the use of spacer plates or brake dust shields. Any such modifications will invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit.
261
Operation
Tyres and wheels
General notes
$ $ $ $ $ $
Only fit tyres and wheels of the same type and make. Only fit tyres of the correct size onto the wheels. Run in new tyres at moderate speeds for the first 100 km. Check the tyres and wheels regularly for damage. Clean heavily soiled wheels, even on the inside (e.g. following journeys through mud). Do not continue to use tyres with severely worn treads. Tyre grip is rapidly reduced on wet roads if the tyres have a tread depth of less than four millimetres.
If the vehicle is laden, check the tyre pressures and correct them if necessary. Fit new tyres on the front wheels first if tyres of the same size are fitted on the front and rear wheels. Store tyres in a cool, dry place, preferably in the dark. Protect the tyres from oil, grease and petrol. your driving style the tyre pressure the distance driven
!
Damage to the rim could lead to the loss of air, which in turn could damage the tyres. Also check the tyres and rims after contact with a kerb or pothole, for example. Direction of rotation Tyres with a specified direction of rotation offer additional benefits, e.g. in the event of aquaplaning. These benefits will only be available to you if the correct direction of rotation is observed. An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates its correct direction of rotation. You may fit a spare tyre against the direction of rotation.
The service life of a tyre depends on:

$ $ $
Replace the tyres and spare wheels, regardless of the degree of tyre wear, after no more than six years. This applies even if a longer service life is quoted.
262
Operation
Tyres and wheels
Tyre pressures Risk of accident
Tyre pressure values given for low loads are minimum values which offer you good ride comfort characteristics. You can, however, also use the values for higher loads. These are permissible and will not adversely affect the running of the vehicle. However, ride comfort will be impaired to some degree.
If the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tyre pressures and correct them if necessary. Tyre pressure changes by approximately 0.1 bar for every 10 C change in ambient temperature. If you measure the tyre pressure indoors where the temperature differs from the outside temperature, you will have to correct the measured value accordingly. When the vehicle is driven, the tyre temperature, and with it the tyre pressure, will increase depending on the road speed and the load on the tyres.
If the pressure in a tyre drops repeatedly:

$ $
inspect the tyre for foreign objects check whether air is escaping from the wheel or the valve
The pressure of warm tyres should only be corrected if it is too low for the current operating conditions. You will find a table of tyre pressures for warm and cold tyres on the inside of the vehicle's fuel filler flap. If possible, you should only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold.
Environmental note
Check the tyre pressures regularly, at least every 14 days. If the tyre pressures are too low, fuel consumption will increase.
263
Operation
Tyres and wheels
Interchanging wheels Risk of accident Clean the inner section of the wheel whenever you interchange wheels. Check the tyre pressures. Risk of accident
Risk of accident
Only interchange the front and rear wheels if they are of the same size.
The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres differ depending on the operating conditions. On vehicles with the same size wheels, you can interchange the wheels every 5,000 to 10,000 km depending on the degree of wear of the tyres. Make sure that the direction of rotation of the wheels is retained. Interchange the wheels before too definite a wear pattern has formed on the tyres. The front tyres typically wear more on the outer shoulder, and the rear tyres in the centre of the tread.
After changing the wheel, have the tightening torque checked at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The wheel bolts may work loose if they are not tightened to a tightening torque of 130 Nm.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for safety reasons, you only use wheel bolts that are suitable and have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
i
We recommend that you have wheels changed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
264
Operation
Driving tips Driving tips
You will find basic information about driving the vehicle in the "Getting started" section (5 page 26). Driving and parking Risk of fire After a cold start

Warm the engine up quickly. You can use the engine's full power once it has reached operating temperature.
Free-wheeling with the engine switched off Risk of accident
Pulling away on a slippery surface
The exhaust system can become very hot, especially after a long journey. Do not park the vehicle next to easily ignitable material (straw, petrol, leaves, etc.), e.g. in a field. The flammable material may otherwise ignite and set fire to parts of the vehicle.
!
Try not to let the drive wheels spin. You could otherwise damage the drive train. Engage the differential locks as required (5 page 174).
There is no power assistance for the steering and braking when the engine is not running. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. You could therefore lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. Never switch off the engine while the vehicle is in motion.
265
Operation
Driving tips
Braking Shift down to a lower gear (shift range 1, 2 or 3) on long and steep downhill gradients (5 page 167). This will prevent the brakes overheating and wearing out too quickly. It is best not to stop the vehicle immediately after the brakes have been subjected to an extreme load; continue driving for a short time instead. The brakes are cooled down more quickly in the airflow. The first time the brakes are applied after a long period of driving in heavy rain without braking, it is possible that:
$ $
You should therefore maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front. Apply the brakes firmly after driving on wet roads, especially if the road has been salted. The brake discs will be warmed, dry more quickly and be protected against corrosion. If you make only moderate use of the brakes, check from time to time that they are fully functional. To do this, brake more sharply at a higher speed. The brake will grip better as a result.
Risk of accident
Make sure that other road users are not endangered when the brakes are applied in this way.
there will be a delayed braking response you will need to depress the brake pedal more firmly
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have components such as brake pads fitted to your vehicle which have been approved for MercedesBenz vehicles. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for MercedesBenz may adversely affect the safety of your vehicle.
266
Operation
Driving tips
Parking brake You can briefly apply the parking brake when the vehicle is moving to achieve a better braking effect between service intervals. Drive at a speed of around 30 km/h on a dry and level road. Pull the parking brake lever up keeping the release knob pressed (5 page 36) until the vehicle brakes noticeably. Hold the lever in this position for around ten seconds and then guide it fully back down again.
!
Do not drive faster than 40 km/h. You could otherwise damage the brakes.
Overrun cut-off The fuel supply is cut off if the driver's foot is completely removed from the accelerator pedal when the engine is overrunning. Driving in wet conditions If there is a certain amount of water on the road surface, the vehicle may aquaplane, even though:
$ $
Risk of accident
Make sure that other road users are not endangered when the brakes are applied in this way. The brake lamps do not light up when the parking brake is applied.
you are driving at low speeds the tyre tread depth is sufficient
For this reason, do not drive in tyre ruts and brake carefully.
267
Operation
Driving tips
Tyre grip While you may still be able to control your vehicle at a given speed on a dry road surface, you must reduce your speed on a wet surface to maintain the same degree of safety. Pay particular attention to road conditions when the temperature is around freezing. If ice has formed on the road (e.g. due to freezing fog), applying the brakes can cause a thin layer of water to form rapidly on the surface of the ice. This layer of water considerably reduces tyre grip. Drive with particular care in such weather conditions. Driving in winter Risk of accident
Risk of injury
Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, you must make sure that the area immediately surrounding the vehicle, and in particular next to the exhaust system, is kept free of snow while the engine is running. Exhaust fumes (including carbon monoxide) could otherwise get into the vehicle interior and, in high concentrations, could cause unconsciousness or death. Make sure that there is a sufficient flow of fresh air in to the vehicle immediately (e.g. slightly open the windows on the lee side of the vehicle).
268
Operation
Driving tips
Drive with particular care on icy roads. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering manoeuvres and braking. If it seems likely that the vehicle is about to enter a skid or cannot be stopped at a low speed:

Off-road driving Risk of accident
Never allow the vehicle to roll backwards when in neutral or with the clutch disengaged. If you only use the brakes, you could lose control of the vehicle. Grains of sand, particles of dirt and other abrasive materials can enter the brake system. This can lead to excessive wear and unpredictable braking effect. Have the brakes checked and cleaned after they have been exposed to dirt. There is otherwise the danger that there will not be sufficient braking effect available in an emergency. You could therefore endanger yourself and others. Take the vehicle's centre of gravity into account, especially if the vehicle has roof attachments or is carrying a load.
Select neutral. Move the selector lever to N. Try to keep the vehicle under control using corrective steering.
Drive slowly in rough terrain with which you are unfamiliar. This will make it easier to recognise unexpected obstacles and avoid damage to the vehicle. Do not perform U-turns on mountain roads. The vehicle could tip. If a slope is too steep for the vehicle, drive back in reverse gear. Do not drive at an angle up steep inclines. The vehicle could tip. If you drive up a steep incline at an angle and the vehicle threatens to tip, steer at once into the line of fall.
You will find information on driving with snow chains later in this section (5 page 278).
269
Operation
Driving tips

Read this section before travelling offroad in your vehicle. Practise by travelling first over more gentle off-road terrain.
Rules for off-road driving Risk of injury
Shift the transfer case to LOW before driving off-road (5 page 170). Make sure that items of luggage and loads are stored safely and are well secured (5 page 104). Always keep the engine running and in gear when driving on a downhill gradient. Drive slowly and evenly, if necessary at a walking pace. Ensure that the wheels are in contact with the ground at all times. Drive with extreme care on unknown off-road routes where visibility is poor. For safety reasons, get out of the vehicle first and survey the off-road route.
The following driving systems are specially suited to off-road travel:

$ $ $
Transfer case (5 page 170) Differential locks (5 page 173) 4-ETS (5 page 72)
Make sure you secure loose objects in your vehicle before starting a journey. These could otherwise be thrown about in the vehicle interior in the event of an accident, sharp braking or sudden change in direction and you or other occupants could be injured. Secure objects in the luggage compartment where possible. Always use a safety net if you are carrying a load. However, the net cannot secure sharp or heavy objects.
$ $ $
270
Operation
Driving tips
$ $ $
Check the depth of water before fording. Look out for obstacles such as rocks, holes, tree stumps and furrows. Always keep the side windows and the sliding sunroof* closed during the journey. Do not stray from marked routes or paths. Environmental note
Checklist for off-road driving Engine oil level

$
Tyres and wheels Risk of accident

$ $
Check the engine oil level using the operating system (5 page 254). The ENGINE OIL LEVEL O.K. message must appear in the multi-function display. Only if this is the case is the engine supplied with sufficient oil if the vehicle is subjected to sharp inclines on offroad terrain.
Check tread depth and tyre pressure. Check for damage and remove foreign objects (e.g. small stones) from the tyre tread. Replace any missing valve caps. Replace dented or damaged wheels. Check the spare wheel before the journey.
$ $ $
Protection of the environment is of primary importance. Treat nature with respect. Observe all prohibiting signs.
Vehicle tool kit

$ $
Check that the jack is in working order. Make certain that there is a nut wrench, a strong tow rope and a spade in the vehicle.
271
Operation
Driving tips
Tips for driving off-road Mountainous terrain
$ $
Gradient:
Maximum gradient climbing ability: The maximum gradient climbing ability is 80% if the transfer case is shifted to the LOW transfer range.
Follow the line of fall on slopes and steep inclines. Shift the transfer case to LOW before driving on extreme uphilland and downhill gradients (5 page 170). Engage the differential locks if necessary (5 page 174). Observe the warnings for off-road driving (5 page 269). Drive slowly. Accelerate carefully and make sure that the wheels are gripping. Avoid high engine speeds. Select the automatic transmission shift range that is appropriate for the uphill gradient. Long-wheelbase station wagon Short-wheelbase station wagon Cabriolet The table shows the gradient with the maximum payload. 1 34 36 34 2 29 27 26 P00.00-3288-31
i
If the load on the front axle is reduced when pulling away on a mountain slope, the front wheels have a tendency to spin. 4-ETS recognises this and brakes the wheels accordingly. The rear wheel torque is increased and it is easier to pull away.
$ $ $ $ $ $
272
Operation
Driving tips
Brow of hill When driving up an uphill gradient, reduce pressure on the accelerator slightly immediately before reaching the brow of the hill. Make use of the vehicle's own impetus to travel over the brow. This style of driving prevents:
$ $ $ $
Make use of the engine braking power to reduce speed. Brake gently if this is insufficient. Ensure that the vehicle is moving in the line of fall when doing so. Shift the automatic transmission to shift range 1 before driving on steep downhill gradients. Check that the brakes are working efficiently after a long downhill journey.
Fording
P00.00-3289-31
the vehicle lifting off the ground at the brow of the hill loss of tractive force the vehicle travelling too quickly down the other side
i
ABS is deactivated when the differential locks are engaged. This allows the front wheels to be temporarily locked so that they can grip the loose surface more easily. However, please note that locked wheels spin and cannot be steered.
Establish how deep and rough the water is before fording. The water should be no deeper than 50 cm.
Driving downhill
$ $
Drive slowly. Do not drive at an angle down steep inclines. Steer into the line of fall and drive with the front wheels aligned straight. Otherwise, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and overturn.
Switch off the auxiliary heating (5 page 193).
55
273
Operation
Driving tips
$ $ $ $ $ $
Shift the transfer case to LOW (5 page 170). Engage the differential locks if necessary (5 page 174). Avoid high engine speeds. Drive slowly. Shift the automatic transmission to shift range 1 or 2. Drive into the water where the ground is level and do not exceed walking pace.
$ $
Drive slowly and at an even speed through the water. Do not stop. There is a high degree of water resistance, the surface is slippery and in some cases unstable. It is therefore difficult and dangerous to pull away in the water.
Passing obstacles Observe the following rules when driving over tree stumps, larger stones and other obstacles:
$ $ $ $ $
Shift the transfer case to LOW (5 page 170). Avoid high engine speeds. Shift the automatic transmission to shift range 1. Drive very slowly. Pass straight over obstacles, keeping them to the centre, front wheel first then rear wheel.
$ $ $
Ensure that there is no opportunity for a bow wave to form as you drive. Clean any mud from the tyre tread after fording. Apply the brakes to dry them after fording.
!
Under no circumstances should you enter the water too quickly. The bow wave could cause water to enter and damage the engine and neighbouring assemblies.
!
Obstacles could damage the floor of the vehicle or chassis parts. Ask passengers to offer directions when driving over large obstacles. Any damage to the vehicle always increases the risk of an accident.
274
Operation
Driving tips
Driving on sand
$ $ $
Ruts Observe the following rules when travelling along ruts in off-road terrain or roads with loose gravel:
$ $ $ $
Shift the transfer case to LOW (5 page 170). Avoid high engine speeds. Select the automatic transmission shift range that is appropriate for off-road conditions (5 page 166). Drive quickly to overcome rolling resistance. The vehicle could otherwise dig itself into the sand.
If the route permits, where ruts are too deep drive with the wheels on one side on the middle section of turf.
Shift the transfer case to LOW (5 page 170). Avoid high engine speeds. Shift the automatic transmission to shift range 1. Drive slowly.
Checklist after driving off-road Risk of accident
If ruts are not too deep and your vehicle has sufficient clearance: drive in the tracks of other vehicles.
!
Check that the ruts are not too deep and that your vehicle has sufficient clearance, otherwise your vehicle could:
$ $
If you feel the vehicle vibrate suddenly, hear driving noises or think that your vehicle has been damaged, switch on the hazard warning lamps and slowly come to a stop in a safe place. Check the tyres, vehicle underbody and the engine compartment for damage and leakages. If you think that the vehicle or the tyres are unsafe, have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop.
be damaged bottom out on the central ridge between the ruts and get stuck
275
Operation
Driving tips
Travelling over rough terrain places greater demands on your vehicle than driving on normal roads. After travelling off-road check the vehicle. In that way, you can detect damage promptly and reduce the risk of an accident to yourself and other road users.
$ $ $ $ $ $
Check whether twigs or other parts of plants have become trapped. These increase the risk of fire and can damage fuel pipes, brake hoses or the rubber fittings of the axle joints and drive shafts.
Foreign objects can cause wheel imbalance and vibrations. If you detect strong vibrations after off-road travel, check for foreign objects in the wheels and if necessary remove them. Damage to the vehicle reduces ride comfort and creates the risk of an accident for yourself and other road users. If in any doubt, have your vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Shift the transfer case to HIGH (5 page 170). Clean headlamps and rear lights and check for any damage. Clean the front and rear licence plates. Clean the tyre treads with a water jet and remove any foreign objects. Clean the tyres, wheel arches and underbody with a water jet.
$
After the trip, examine the entire floor assembly, tyres, bodywork structure, steering, chassis and exhaust system immediately for damage. After driving for long periods across sand, mud, water or in similarly dirty conditions have the brake discs, wheels, brake pads and axle joints checked and cleaned at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
276
Operation
Winter driving Winter driving
Have your vehicle winterproofed at the onset of winter at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. This service includes the following:
$
You will find information about diesel fuels and low outside temperatures towards the front of this section (5 page 249). Also observe the notes about driving in winter (5 page 268). Winter tyres Use winter tyres at temperatures below +4 C and on snow or ice-covered roads. The maximum effect of the ABS, BAS, 4-ETS and ESP driving systems is only achieved with winter tyres. Use winter tyres of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics.
Risk of accident
Engine oil change, if the current oil has not been approved for winter use A check on the antifreeze/anti-corrosion concentration Concentrated cleaning agent will be added to the windscreen and headlamp cleaning system washer fluid Battery check A tyre change
You must replace winter tyres with a tread depth of less than 4 mm immediately. They are no longer suitable for winter use.
$ $
$ $
Always observe the maximum permitted speed specified for the winter tyres you have fitted. If you fit winter tyres which have a lower maximum permitted speed than that of the vehicle, affix an appropriate warning sign in the driver's field of vision. You can obtain this from a qualified specialist workshop, such as a MercedesBenz Service Centre.
277
Operation
Winter driving
Snow chains The maximum permissible speed of 50 km/h for snow chains may only be driven on snow. Adapt your driving style accordingly where there is uneven snow cover. If you are not driving on snow, remove the snow chains as soon as possible.
$
Risk of accident
If you fit the spare wheel when driving with winter tyres, please be aware that driving stability will be impaired owing to unstable cornering characteristics caused by the different tyres. You should therefore adapt your driving style to suit these conditions and drive carefully. Have the spare wheel replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Use snow chains on all four wheels to attain maximum traction and driving stability. Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned. Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for safety reasons, you only use snow chains that are suitable and have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. You may obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
i
ESP can be deactivated when pulling away with snow chains (5 page 74). This will help you to achieve a better cutting effect. If you are intending to fit snow chains, please observe the following points:
$
!
You must not fit snow chains to AMG tyres with a dimension of 285/55 R18.
Snow chains cannot be fitted on all wheel/tyre combinations.
278
Operation
Driving abroad Driving abroad
A comprehensive Mercedes-Benz service network is available to you both at home and abroad. The appropriate workshop directories are available from any MercedesBenz Service Centre. Only low-octane fuel is available in certain countries. You will find information on petrol grade on (5 page 248), and diesel grade on (5 page 249). Symmetrical dipped-beam headlamps In countries where vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the road to that in the country in which the vehicle is registered, you must change the headlamps to symmetrical dipped beam. Oncoming traffic will be dazzled less. You can obtain information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
!
DaimlerChrysler recommends the use of genuine Mercedes-Benz masking sheets. Other masking sheets could damage the headlamps. Damage caused by the use of other masking sheets is not covered by our warranty. Remember to change the headlamps back to asymmetrical dipped-beam headlamps when you return to driving on the same side of the road as in the country in which the vehicle was registered.
279
Operation
Trailer towing
Coupling a trailer The maximum noseweight of the trailer towbar on the ball neck is 140 kg (longwheelbase station wagon) or 115 kg (short-wheelbase station wagon/ Cabriolet). It must not exceed the value given on the trailer and the trailer tow hitch type plates. You will find the values:
$ $
Risk of accident
Place the trailer horizontally behind the vehicle.
Make sure that no-one is present between the vehicle and trailer when the vehicle is being reversed up to the trailer. Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If the trailer is not coupled to the towing vehicle correctly, the trailer may break away. Ensure that the following values are not exceeded:
$ $ $ $
i
On vehicles without level control, the height of the ball neck changes when the vehicle is loaded. In this case, you should use a trailer with a heightadjustable drawbar.
in the vehicle documents on the trailer tow hitch type plate
Permissible trailer drawbar noseweight Permissible trailer loads Permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle Permissible gross vehicle weight
!
If possible, use a noseweight as close as possible to the maximum permissible noseweight. However, you should always use a minimum noseweight of 80 kg, otherwise the trailer may work loose.
P31.10-2581-31
Trailer coupled up ready to drive
280
Operation
Trailer towing

Couple the trailer.
Driving with a trailer The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/trailer combinations is 80 km/h in Germany.
!
Note that the payload and the rear axle load are reduced by the actual noseweight.

Your vehicle will have different handling characteristics when it is towing a trailer, compared to when it is driven without a trailer. The vehicle/trailer combination:
$ $ $ $ $ $
!
You should also keep to the maximum speed of 80 km/h even in countries in which higher speeds are permitted for vehicle/trailer combinations.
is heavier has reduced acceleration and gradient climbing capability has a longer braking distance is more affected by gusts of side winds requires more sensitive steering consumes more fuel
Shift the transfer case to LOW before driving on steep uphill or downhill gradients (5 page 170).
i
When driving in mountainous terrain, engine output and gradient-climbing capability decrease with increasing altitude.
281
Operation
Trailer towing
Driving tips
$ $
If the trailer begins to oscillate:

$ $ $
Maintain greater distances than when travelling without a trailer. Avoid braking suddenly. Apply the brakes lightly at first to allow the trailer to run on and then quickly increase the braking force. The vehicle's payload must be reduced according to the noseweight so that the permissible rear axle weight is not exceeded. The gradient-climbing capability from a standstill is correct for sea level. When driving in mountainous areas, note that the power output of the engine, and with it its gradient-climbing capability from a standstill, decreases with increasing altitude.
do not accelerate under any circumstances do not turn the wheel to correct the line brake if necessary Risk of accident
Risk of accident
Do not uncouple a trailer with an overrun brake when the brake is engaged. Your hand could otherwise become trapped between the bumper and drawbar.
Do not under any circumstances attempt to draw out the vehicle/trailer combination by accelerating.
282
Operation
Service Service
Active Service System ASSYST, the Active Service System, informs you when the next service is due. A service due date is displayed approximately one month in advance. You will then see one of the following messages in the multi-function display when you are driving or when the ignition is switched on:
$ $ $
i
The service due date will be displayed in days or kilometres, depending on the distance driven. The time between service due dates depends on your style of driving. It increases if you:
$ $
i
Periods when the battery is disconnected are not recorded by the service indicator. To make sure that you have the service carried out at the correct time, you should therefore subtract any periods of battery disconnection from the service due date displayed. The service indicator does not provide information about the engine oil level. Do not therefore confuse the service indicator with the : engine oil level display. You can call these up separately (5 page 254).
SERVICE A IN xx DAYS SERVICE A IN xx km SERVICE A DUE NOW!
drive with care and at moderate engine speeds avoid journeys which are too short for the engine to reach its operating temperature
P54.30-6244-31 Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6244en-31 Franzsisch: P54.30-6244fr-31 Italienisch: P54.30-6244it-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6865sp-31 The SERVICE A or SERVICE B messages provide information about which type of service is due.
283
Operation
Service
Clearing the service indicator The service indicator goes out automatically after a few seconds. You may also clear the service indicator yourself.

Missing the service due date If you have missed the service due date, you will see one of the following messages in the multi-function display:
$ $
i
If you do not have the specified service carried out, you could be breaking the law.
SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY xx DAYS SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY xx km
Press the reset button on the left-hand side of the instrument cluster (5 page 19).
You also hear a signal. A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the service indicator when the service has been carried out.
284
Operation
Service
Calling up the service due date

Resetting the service indicator If your vehicle is ever serviced other than at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, you can reset the service indicator yourself.

Switch on the ignition. The standard display appears in the multi-function display (5 page 129).
Press the reset button located on the left-hand side of the instrument cluster (5 page 19) for a few seconds. The following message appears in the multi-function display:
DO YOU WANT TO RESET SERVICE INTERVAL? CONFIRM BY USING RESET BUTTON
Press the k or j button on the multi-function display repeatedly until the 9 or service symbol appears with the service due date.
Switch on the ignition. The standard display appears in the multi-function display (5 page 129).
Press the k or j button on the multi-function display repeatedly until the 9 or service symbol appears with the service due date.
Press the reset button to confirm. The service indicator now displays the new value.
i
If you have reset the service indicator accidentally, a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will be able to update it again.
285
Operation
Care
The value of your vehicle will be retained by regular and proper care. The best way to protect your vehicle from harmful environmental influences is to wash it and use protective treatments regularly. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by neglected or inadequate care cannot always be completely remedied. If this is the case, visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Repair damage caused by loose chippings and remove the following substances immediately:
$ $ $ $ $ $
Risk of poisoning
Always follow the instructions for using the care products. Always keep care products tightly closed and out of the reach of children.
i
Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of Mercedes-Benz care products. They are specially designed for MercedesBenz vehicles and are state of the art. You may obtain Mercedes-Benz care products from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Insect remains Bird droppings Tree resin Oils and grease

Fuels
Environmental note
Dispose of empty containers, cleaning cloths and polishing wads in an environmentally-responsible manner.
Tar stains
286
Operation
Care
Caring for the exterior of your vehicle Station wagon Automatic car wash You can clean the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. It is preferable to use automatic car washes that do not have brushes. If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before you drive into the car wash. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windscreen and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears on the windscreen.
!
Fold in the exterior mirrors before using an automatic car wash.
The minimum distance between the highpressure jet and the object to be cleaned must be approximately 30 cm. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not direct it at door joints, air spring bellows, electrical components, connectors or seals. Cabriolet
i
Make sure that exterior mirrors are fully folded out when you leave the automatic car wash. They could otherwise vibrate. High-pressure cleaners
!
Do not clean the vehicle in an automatic car wash. Do not clean the Cabriolet soft top using a high-pressure cleaner. Do not use sharp objects to remove snow and ice.
!
Do not use high-pressure cleaners with round-spray jets for cleaning the tyres. You could otherwise damage the tyres. Replace damaged tyres.
287
Operation
Care
The following methods are sufficient if the soft top is only lightly soiled:
$
dry cleaning rinsing off with clean water petrol or diesel thinner tar or stain remover other organic solvents
Intensive cleaning using MB Cabriolet top care agents kit can restore these dirt-repellent properties. The soft top seams may start to leak either as a result of ageing or of incorrect care and cleaning. In this case, have the soft top seams resealed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Cleaning the windscreen and wiper blades

or
$
Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off (5 page 41).
Do not use:
$ $ $ $
Risk of injury
i
Cover the soft top with a suitable cover if you are leaving the vehicle parked in the open for any length of time.
Remove the key from the ignition lock before cleaning the windscreen or the wiper blades. The windscreen wipers could otherwise be set in motion and injure you.

Frequent cleaning impairs the dirt-repellent properties of the soft top.
Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen until you feel them engage. You can now clean the windscreen and wiper blades. Fold the windscreen wipers back before turning the key in the ignition lock.
288
Operation
Care
Cleaning the headlamps Cleaning the trailer tow hitch* Clean the ball coupling if it is dirty.

!
Only use windscreen washer fluid that is suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Unsuitable windscreen washer fluid may cause damage to the plastic lenses of the headlamps. Do not use:
$ $ $ $
Cleaning the ultrasound reversing aid* sensors
Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or a brush. Remove traces of rust with a wire brush. P88.20-2554-31
!
Do not clean the ball coupling with a high-pressure cleaner. Do not use any solvents.

a dry cloth abrasive products solvents cleaning agents which contain solvents
You should also lightly oil or grease the coupling ball after cleaning.
1 Sensors

You could otherwise scratch or damage the plastic lamp lenses.
i
Your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre will also carry out this maintenance work.
Clean bumper sensors 1 with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
!
Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths. Do not scrub. You will otherwise scratch or damage the sensors.
289
290
Practical advice
Troubleshooting Display messages Where will I find...? Opening/closing in an emergency Changing bulbs Replacing the wiper blades Flat tyre Battery Jump-starting Towing Fuses
291
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
You will find practical help for possible problems in the "Practical advice" section. Problem The anti-theft alarm system* is suddenly triggered. Possible cause Suggested solutions
You opened the vehicle using the emergency Switch off the anti-theft alarm system*: key element while the anti-theft alarm sys Press the or button on the tem* was still primed. key. or

Insert the key in the ignition lock.
A warning sounds.
A message appears in the multi-function dis- Observe the notes (5 page 316). play. You are driving with the parking brake on. You have forgotten to switch off the lights.

Release the parking brake (5 page 36). Turn the light switch to 0.
You did not move the selector lever to P after Move the selector lever to P. switching off the engine and you opened the driver's door.
292
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem You wish to leave your vehicle parked up for a long period.
Possible cause
Suggested solutions

Disconnect the battery. Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Do not use too much throttle. Have the cause eliminated immediately at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Have the cause checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. If you drive for a short distance with the lights on, the headlamps will no longer be misted up.
The engine is not running smoothly and it is An ignition cable could be damaged. misfiring. There could be a malfunction in the engine Unburned petrol may flow into the catalytic electronics. converter and cause damage. The preglow indicator lamp does not light up when the key is in position 2. The preglow system has malfunctioned.
The headlamps are misted up on the inside. High degree of humidity.
293
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem The engine will not start.
Possible cause There could be a malfunction in the engine electronics. There could be a malfunction in the petrol supply.
Suggested solutions

Turn the ignition back to 0 before attempting to start the engine again. Repeat the starting procedure (5 page 37). Remember that excessively long attempts to start the engine will drain the battery. If the on-board voltage is too low, try jump-starting (5 page 377). If the engine does not start after several starting attempts, consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Bleed the fuel system (5 page 251).

Vehicles with diesel engines: the fuel tank has run dry.
294
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem The coolant display shows a temperature above +120 C.
Possible cause The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being sufficiently cooled.
Suggested solutions

Stop at the earliest opportunity and allow the engine and coolant to cool down. Check the coolant level and top up the coolant if necessary (5 page 258). Do not start the engine under any circumstances. Inform a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Inform a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock and start the engine as usual.
You have had an accident. The vehicle is losing fuel.

You have had an accident. You are unable to determine the extent of the damage. You have had an accident. You are unable to determine any damage to:
$ $ $
the major components the fuel system the engine mountings
295
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Automatic transmission Problem Problems with gearshifts. Possible cause The transmission is losing oil. Suggested solutions

Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
The acceleration capability is deteriorating. The transmission is operating in emergency Stop the vehicle. mode. You can only shift to 2nd and reverse The transmission will not shift. Move the selector lever to P. gear. Switch off the engine.

Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. Shift the selector lever to D (2nd gear) or R. Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
296
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Soft top switch* Problem The Cabriolet soft top does not open or close. Possible cause Suggested solutions
The soft top closing procedure was interrupt- Wait about five seconds and then reed. peat the process. The fuse is defective. The hydraulic pump has overheated.

Check the fuse (5 page 383) and replace it if necessary. Wait a few minutes and then repeat the process.
55
297
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem The Cabriolet soft top does not open or close.
Possible cause The control unit is malfunctioning because the closing procedure was interrupted.
Suggested solutions

Move the key to position 0 and back to 2 in the ignition lock. Try to close the soft top again. Close the soft top manually (5 page 354). Have the system checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
If it still fails to close electrically:

298
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Keys Problem The key cannot be turned in the ignition lock. Possible cause Suggested solutions
The key has been in position 0 in the ignition Remove the key and re-insert it in the lock for a considerable period of time. ignition lock. The starter battery is discharged.

Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary. Jump-starting may be performed. Check the batteries in the key (5 page 84) and replace them if necessary (5 page 349). Open the door with the emergency key element (5 page 348). Open the rear door with the emergency key element (5 page 348). Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre.
You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with The batteries in the key are discharged. the key. The key is faulty.

299
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions

The battery check lamp on the key does not The batteries in the key are discharged. light up when tested.
Change the batteries (5 page 349). You can obtain batteries from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, for example.
You have lost the key.

Have the key cancelled immediately at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. If necessary, have the manual locks changed too.
Any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre will be happy to provide you with a replacement.
300
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem You have lost the emergency key element.
Possible cause
Suggested solutions

Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. If necessary, have the manual locks changed too.
Any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre will be happy to provide you with a replacement.
301
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Windscreen wipers Problem The windscreen wipers are jammed. Possible cause Suggested solutions
The windscreen wipers are jammed, e.g. due For safety reasons, you should first reto leaves or snow. The wiper motor has been move the key from the ignition lock. deactivated. Then remove the cause of the obstruction.

Switch on the windscreen wipers again. Select the next highest wiper speed on the combination switch. Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
The windscreen wipers fail completely at speed I.

302
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Lamps in the switches and buttons Problem One or both of the lamps in the switch for the seat heating* are flashing. Possible cause Suggested solutions
There is insufficient voltage because too The seat heating* will automatically many consumers are switched on. The seat switch back on as soon as there is suffiheating* has switched itself off automatical- cient voltage again. ly. The air-conditioning system is losing refriger- Have the air-conditioning system ant. The compressor has switched itself off. checked at a qualified specialist workThe cooling system cannot be activated. shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. There is insufficient voltage because too The rear window heating will automaticalmany consumers are switched on. The rear ly switch back on as soon as there is sufwindow heating* has switched itself off auto- ficient voltage again. matically.
The indicator lamp in the button on the Thermatic control panel lights up or flashes when you press the button. The rear window heating switches off too soon and the indicator lamp is flashing.
303
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
The AIRBAG OFF warning lamp on the cen- A child seat is fitted to the front-passenger tre console lights up. seat. The front-passenger airbag has been deactivated. If there is no child seat fitted to the frontpassenger seat, the child seat recognition has malfunctioned.

Only use the rearward-facing child seat on the rear seat. Have the automatic child seat recognition checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
304
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions

The TeleAid* indicator lamp in the overhead The emergency call system has malfunccontrol panel lights up while you are driving. tioned. If the indicator lamp goes out again after some time, the system has developed a temporary fault. The TeleAid* indicator lamp in the overhead The emergency call system has malfunccontrol panel does not light up after the ig- tioned. nition has been switched on.
Have the TeleAid* system checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Have the TeleAid* system checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
305
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
A warning sounds when the selector lever is You have attached a trailer. moved to position R and none of the seg- You have inserted an adapter plug in the trail- Remove the adapter plug. ments in the ultrasound reversing aid* light er socket. The ultrasound reversing aid* funcup. tions again as normal. A deep warning tone sounds when the vehi- The ultrasound reversing aid* sensors are cle is reversing. dirty or are malfunctioning.

Clean the ultrasound reversing aid* sensors (5 page 289). Switch on the ignition again.
This may be caused by an external radio or Check the ultrasound reversing aid* ultrasound source. The ultrasound reversing at another location. aid* switches itself off. A deep warning tone sounds when the vehi- The ultrasound reversing aid* is malfunction- Have the ultrasound reversing aid* cle is reversing, or no warning sounds and ing and has switched itself off. checked as soon as possible at a none of the segments lights up. qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
306
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Lamps in the instrument cluster Problem Possible cause Suggested solutions
You have engaged the differential locks. ABS, ABS, ESP and BAS are re-activated The yellow ABS, ESP, 4-ETS once you have disengaged the differwarning lamp lights up while you ESP and BAS have been deactivated. ential locks. are driving. Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (5 page 316). ESP is deactivated. There is an increased risk Re-activate ESP (5 page 75). of accident. You should always adapt your driving style to the current road and weather conditions.
307
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
ESP or traction control is in operation be Only use as much throttle as necesThe yellow ABS, ESP, 4-ETS cause at least one of the wheels has reached sary when pulling away. warning lamp lights up while you its tyre grip limit. are driving. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal again while driving.

Adapt your driving style to the current road and weather conditions. Do not deactivate ESP, otherwise there would be an increased risk of accident (for exceptions (5 page 74)).
308
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause The yellow ABS indicator lamp lights up while you are driving. You have engaged the differential locks.
Suggested solutions

ABS is re-activated once you have disengaged the differential locks.
ABS has been deactivated due to undervolt- Switch off all consumers which are age. Perhaps the battery is not being not required. charged. ABS is available again if the battery voltage increases.

Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (5 page 316).
55
309
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause The yellow ABS indicator lamp lights up while you are driving.
Suggested solutions
ABS has been deactivated due to a malfunc- Consult a qualified specialist worktion. ESP, BAS and 4-ETS have also been deshop as soon as possible which has activated. Other systems, e.g. the navigation the necessary specialist knowledge system* or the ultrasound reversing aid*, and tools to carry out the work remay fail if the ABS control unit malfunctions. quired. Mercedes-Benz recommends The normal effect of the brake system is still that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service available without ABS. Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safetyrelated systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of accident.

310
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
There is insufficient brake fluid in the reser- Risk of accident. Do not drive on. ConThe red brake system warning sult a qualified specialist workshop lamp lights up while you are driv- voir. which has the necessary specialist ing and a warning sounds. knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a MercedesBenz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

55
311
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause You are driving with the parking brake on. The red brake system warning lamp lights up while you are driving and a warning sounds.
Suggested solutions

Release the parking brake (5 page 36). Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (5 page 316).
The red restraint system warning The restraint systems have malfunctioned. Drive on carefully to a qualified specialist workshop which has the neceslamp does not light up when the The airbags or belt tensioners could be triggered unintentionally, or not at all in an accisary specialist knowledge and tools key is in position 1. dent. to carry out the work required. The red restraint system warning Mercedes-Benz recommends that you lamp flickers or lights up while use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre you are driving. for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
312
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause The red restraint system warning The red restraint system warning lamp is lamp does not light up when the faulty. key is in position 2.
Suggested solutions

Drive on carefully to a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
<
The red seat belt warning lamp The warning lamp is to remind you to fasten Put on your seat belt. lights up after starting the engine your seat belt. and a warning sounds. The fuel reserve warning lamp flashes while you are driving. The fuel level has fallen below the reserve mark.

Refuel at the nearest filling station (5 page 247). Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (5 page 316).
313
Practical advice
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause The yellow engine diagnostic in- There is a malfunction dicator lamp lights up while you $ in the fuel injection system are driving. $ in the ignition system, or
$
Suggested solutions

Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
in the exhaust system
The emission limit values may have been exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency mode. The fuel tank has run dry.

Start the engine three to four times after refuelling. Emergency mode will be cancelled. You do not need to have your vehicle checked.
314
Practical advice
Display messages Display messages
The control system displays warnings or malfunctions in the multi-function display. Certain messages are accompanied by an alarm or a continuous tone. High priority messages are highlighted in red in the display. These messages are printed in red in the following tables. Act in accordance with the messages and observe the additional notes in this Owner's Manual.
$
If you select the Malfunction memory menu in the operating system (5 page 137), both acknowledged and unacknowledged messages will be shown. Risk of accident
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can acknowledge lower priority messages with one of the buttons on the steering wheel or with the reset button. These are then stored in the malfunction memory. The highest priority messages cannot be acknowledged and are automatically stored in the malfunction memory.
No messages are displayed if the instrument cluster or the multi-function display has malfunctioned. Systems which seriously impair the handling characteristics could have failed. Contact a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required.
i
All the indicator lamps and the multifunction display are activated when you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Check their function before commencing a journey. The following pages show all the display messages. So that you can find the relevant message more easily, the messages are divided up as follows:
$ $
Text messages from (5 page 316) onwards in alphabetical order Symbol messages from (5 page 322) onwards
315
Practical advice
Display messages
Text messages Display messages Possible cause You have engaged the differential locks. ABS has malfunctioned. The normal effect of the brake system is available without ABS. Possible solution

ABS ABS
NOT AVAILABLE DISABLING ACTIVE ABS SYSTEM VISIT WORKSHOP!
ABS is re-activated once you have disengaged the differential locks. Drive on carefully.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, there is a risk of an accident. G
316
Practical advice
Display messages
Display message
Possible cause
VISIT WORKSHOP! DISPLAY FAULTY:
Possible solution

ABS
ABS or the ABS display has malfunctioned.
Drive on carefully.
317
Practical advice
Display messages
Display message
Possible cause
BRAKE ASSIST VISIT WORKSHOP!
Possible solution

BAS
BAS has been deactivated due to a malfunction. The normal effect of the brake system is available without BAS.
Drive on carefully.
318
Practical advice
Display messages
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution

BAS
BAS or the BAS display has malfunctioned.
Drive on carefully.
EPC
ELEC. POW. CONTROL VISIT WORKSHOP!
There is a malfunction in the diesel Visit a qualified specialist workshop immeengine electronics. The engine powdiately, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Cener output is reduced. tre.

Do not drive at full throttle and do not exceed an engine speed of 2,500 rpm.
319
Practical advice
Display messages
Display message
Possible cause
ELEC. STABIL. PROG. NOT AVAILABLE
Possible solution
ESP
ESP, ABS and BAS have been deac- Turn the steering wheel from full lock to full tivated following a battery voltage lock and then back to the centre position. supply interruption. The system The system is reset. The message will go must be reset. out. ESP, ABS and BAS are temporarily unavailable because the system's self-diagnosis feature has not yet been deactivated.

Drive a short distance at a speed of over 20 km/h. The message will go out.
ESP
ELEC. STABIL. PROG. VISIT WORKSHOP!
ESP, ABS and BAS have been deac- Drive on carefully. tivated due to a malfunction or volt Visit a qualified specialist workshop immeage supply interruption. The normal diately which has the necessary specialist effect of the brake system is still knowledge and tools to carry out the work available without these systems. required. Mercedes-Benz recommends If ABS has also malfunctioned, the that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service engine power may be reduced. Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, there is a risk of an accident. G
320
Practical advice
Display messages
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
ESP
ESP or the ESP display has malfunc- Drive on carefully. tioned. Visit a qualified specialist workshop immeThe normal effect of the brake sysdiately which has the necessary specialist tem is available. knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, there is a risk of an accident. G
321
Practical advice
Display messages
Symbol message Display symbol Display message
UNDERVOLTAGE ENGINE ON UNDERVOLTAGE SWITCH CONSUMERS OFF! BATTERY/ALTERNATOR VISIT WORKSHOP!
Possible cause The vehicle battery has insufficient voltage. The vehicle battery has insufficient voltage. The battery was charged using a battery charger or was jump-started. The battery is no longer being charged. Possible causes:
$ $
Possible solution

Start the engine. Switch off all consumers which are not required. Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Stop immediately and check the poly-V-belt. If it is torn:

Faulty alternator Torn poly-V-belt
Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Drive immediately to a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
If it is OK:

322
Practical advice
Display messages
Display symbol
Display message
BRAKE FLUID VISIT WORKSHOP!
Possible cause There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.
Possible solution

Stop the vehicle immediately, observing the road and traffic conditions. Do not drive any further.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not top up the brake fluid. This will not rectify the fault. Otherwise, there is a risk of an accident. G
BRAKE PAD WEAR VISIT WORKSHOP!
The brake pads have reached their wear limits.
Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible.
323
Practical advice
Display messages
Display symbol
Display message
DRIVER'S SEAT LOCK! FR. PASSENGER SEAT LOCK!
Possible cause The driver's seat backrest was not locked properly. The front-passenger seat backrest was not locked properly. You are driving with the parking brake on.
Possible solution

( !
Lock the driver's seat backrest again (5 page 96). Lock the front-passenger seat backrest again (5 page 96). Release the parking brake (5 page 36).
PARKING BRAKE RELEASE PARKING BRAKE! TEL ENTER PIN FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE!
You have not yet entered the PIN for Enter the PIN for your SIM card your telephone. (5 page 159). You have inadvertently pressed the or button on the multifunction steering wheel, even though your vehicle is not equipped with a telephone*. The rear door is open.

BOOT OPEN!
Close the rear door.
324
Practical advice
Display messages
Display symbol
Display message
DRIVER'S SEAT BELT PLEASE FASTEN BELT!
Possible cause You have not fastened your seat belt. The message reminds you to fasten your seat belt. You have not fastened your seat belt. The message reminds you to fasten your seat belt. The seat belt system has malfunctioned. The coolant level is too low.
Possible solution

<
Put on your seat belt.
FR. PASS. SEAT BELT PLEASE FASTEN BELT!
Put on your seat belt.
SEAT BELT SYSTEM VISIT WORKSHOP!
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Top up the coolant (5 page 258). If you are having to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre. Keep an eye on the coolant temperature display (5 page 134). Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Cen55 tre.
COOLANT CHECK LEVEL!

COOLANT VISIT WORKSHOP!
The fan is faulty. The coolant is not being sufficiently cooled.

325
Practical advice
Display messages
Display symbol
Display message
COOLANT STOP, ENGINE OFF!
Possible cause The poly-V-belt may be torn.
Possible solution Stop immediately and check the poly-V-belt. If it is torn:

Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Do not start the engine until the message has gone out, otherwise you could damage the engine. Keep an eye on the coolant temperature (5 page 134). Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
If it is OK:

326
Practical advice
Display messages
Display symbol
Display message
DIPPED BEAM, L CHECK LAMP!
Possible cause The left-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty.
Possible solution

Change the bulb as soon as possible. Visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Change the bulb as soon as possible. Visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Change the bulb as soon as possible. Change the bulb as soon as possible. Change the bulb as soon as possible. Change the bulb as soon as possible. Change the bulb as soon as possible. Remove the key.
55
DIPPED BEAM, R CHECK LAMP!
The right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty.

TRAILER TURN SIGNAL, L CHECK LAMP! TRAILER TURN SIGNAL, R CHECK LAMP! TRAILER BRAKE LAMP CHECK LAMP! TRAILER TAIL LIGHT, L CHECK LAMP! TRAILER TAIL LIGHT, R CHECK LAMP! AUTOM. LIGHT ON REMOVE KEY!
The left-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty. The right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty. The trailer brake light is faulty. The left-hand trailer tail light is faulty. The right-hand trailer tail light is faulty. You have left the key in the ignition lock.

327
Practical advice
Display messages
Display symbol
Display message
REAR TURN SIGNAL, L CHECK LAMP! REAR TURN SIGNAL, R CHECK LAMP! ADD. TURN SIG LAMP, RH CHECK LAMP!
Possible cause The rear left-hand turn signal lamp is faulty.
Possible solution

Change the bulb as soon as possible.
The rear right-hand turn signal lamp Change the bulb as soon as possible. is faulty. The left-hand turn signal lamp on Visit a qualified specialist workshop as the exterior mirror is faulty. You will soon as possible, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz not see this message unless all the Service Centre. LEDs have blown. The right-hand turn signal lamp on Visit a qualified specialist workshop as the exterior mirror is faulty. You will soon as possible, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz not see this message unless all the Service Centre. LEDs have blown.
ADD. TURN SIG LAMP, LH CHECK LAMP!
328
Practical advice
Display messages
Display symbol
Display message
TURN SIGNAL, F, L CHECK LAMP! SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! TURN SIGNAL F, R CHECK LAMP! SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! BRAKE LAMP VISIT WORKSHOP! TRAILER BRAKE LAMP VISIT WORKSHOP! LICENSE PLATE LAMP, L CHECK LAMP! LICENCE PLATE LAMP, R CHECK LAMP!
Possible cause The front left-hand turn signal lamp is faulty. Another bulb adopts the function. The front right-hand turn signal lamp is faulty. Another bulb adopts the function.
Possible solution

The brake lamp lights up after a de- Visit a qualified specialist workshop as lay, or is continuously lit. soon as possible, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The brake lamp on the trailer lights up after a delay, or is continuously lit. The left-hand licence plate lamp is faulty.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Change the bulb as soon as possible.
55
The right-hand licence plate lamp is Change the bulb as soon as possible. faulty.
329
Practical advice
Display messages
Display symbol
Display message
LIGHTS SWITCH OFF LIGHTS! FRONT FOGLAMP, L CHECK LAMP! FRONT FOGLAMP, R CHECK LAMP! SWITCH OFF REAR FOGLAMP SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! SWITCH OFF CHECK LAMP! FR. LEFT PARKG LAMP CHECK LAMP! SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! FR. RIGHT PARKG LAMP CHECK LAMP! SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!
Possible cause The lights are switched on and the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock. The front left-hand foglamp is faulty. The front right-hand foglamp is faulty. A lamp is faulty. The lamp adopts the function of another lamp. The rear foglamp is faulty. The front left-hand parking lamp is faulty. Another bulb adopts the function.
Possible solution

Switch off the lights.

Change the bulb as soon as possible. Change the bulb as soon as possible. Switch off the rear foglamp.

Change the bulb as soon as possible. Change the bulb as soon as possible.
The front right-hand parking lamp is Change the bulb as soon as possible. faulty. Another bulb adopts the function.
330
Practical advice
Display messages
Display symbol
Display message
REVERSING LAMP CHECK LAMP! TAIL LIGHT, L CHECK LAMP! SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! TAIL LIGHT, R CHECK LAMP! SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! LIGHT SENSOR VISIT WORKSHOP!
Possible cause The reversing light is faulty.
Possible solution

The left-hand tail lamp is faulty. An- Change the bulb as soon as possible. other bulb adopts the function. The right-hand tail lamp is faulty. Another bulb adopts the function. The light sensor is faulty. The light switches on automatically.


Reset the light to manual operation in the operating system (5 page 145). Switch the lighting on and off using the light switch (5 page 115).
MAIN BEAM, L CHECK LAMP! MAIN BEAM, R CHECK LAMP!
The left-hand main-beam headlamp Change the bulb as soon as possible. is faulty. The right-hand main-beam headlamp is faulty.

331
Practical advice
Display messages
Display symbol
Display message
BRAKE LAMP, L CHECK LAMP! BRAKE LAMP, R CHECK LAMP! 3RD BRAKE LAMP CHECK LAMP! SIDELIGHT, L CHECK LAMP! SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! SIDELIGHT, R CHECK LAMP! SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! VISIT WORKSHOP! DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
Possible cause The left-hand brake lamp is faulty. The right-hand brake lamp is faulty. The third brake lamp is faulty. You will not see this message unless all the LEDs have blown.
Possible solution

Change the bulb as soon as possible. Change the bulb as soon as possible. Visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Change the bulb as soon as possible.
The lighting display has failed.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
332
Practical advice
Display messages
Display symbol
Display message
BONNET OPEN! ENGINE AIR CLEANER VISIT WORKSHOP!
Possible cause You are driving with the bonnet open. The engine air cleaner is clogged and must be cleaned. The engine oil level is too low.
Possible solution

Close the bonnet (5 page 253). Visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Check the engine oil level and top up the engine oil if necessary (5 page 254).
ENGINE OIL LEVEL CHECK LEVEL! ENGINE OIL LEVEL STOP, ENGINE OFF!
There is no oil left in the engine. Stop the vehicle immediately, observing There is a danger of engine damage. the road and traffic conditions.

Switch off the engine. Top up the engine oil and check the engine oil level (5 page 254). Siphon off the oil. Observe legal requirements.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL REDUCE OIL LEVEL!
You have added too much engine oil. There is a risk of damaging the engine or catalytic converter.
333
Practical advice
Display messages
Display symbol
Display message
ENGINE OIL VISIT WORKSHOP!
Possible cause The engine oil level has dropped to a critical level.
Possible solution

Check the engine oil level (5 page 254) and top up with oil if necessary. If you are having to top up the engine oil frequently, have the engine checked for any leaks at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Have the oil checked. Have the measuring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
There is water in the oil.

ENGINE OIL LEVEL VISIT WORKSHOP!

The measurement system is faulty.
334
Practical advice
Display messages
Display symbol
Display message
RESTRAINT SYSTEM VISIT WORKSHOP!
Possible cause
Possible solution
The restraint systems have mal Drive on carefully. functioned. The airbags and belt Visit a qualified specialist workshop immetensioners could be triggered unindiately which has the necessary specialist tentionally, or not at all in the event knowledge and tools to carry out the work of an accident. required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The key is no longer working.

REPLACE KEY VISIT WORKSHOP!
Visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
335
Practical advice
Display messages
Display symbol
Display message
TELEAID VISIT WORKSHOP! TELEAID BATTERY VISIT WORKSHOP!
Possible cause One or more of the main TeleAid* functions are faulty.
Possible solution

Have TeleAid* checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
The TeleAid* emergency power bat- Have TeleAid* checked at a qualified spetery is faulty. If the vehicle's battery cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz is also discharged, TeleAid* does Service Centre. not function. Speedtronic or the cruise control system are faulty. The fuel level has fallen below the reserve mark. You wish to set off but not all the doors are closed.

A J
SPEEDTRONIC/ CRUISE CONTROL VISIT WORKSHOP! RESERVE FUEL VISIT FILLING STATION DOOR OPEN!
Have Speedtronic and the cruise control checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Refuel at the nearest filling station (5 page 247). Close the doors.

336
Practical advice
Display messages
Display symbol
Display message
WASHER FLUID CHECK LEVEL! VISIT WORKSHOP! DISPLAY FAULTY:
Possible cause The washer fluid level has gone down to about 1/3 of the reservoir capacity. The displays for several systems have failed. This could mean that some systems have also failed.
Possible solution

W G
Top up the washer fluid (5 page 259).

Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of accident.
337
Practical advice
Display messages
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
Some electronic systems can no Have the electronic systems checked at a longer supply information to the opqualified specialist workshop, e.g. a erating system. The following sysMercedes-Benz Service Centre. tems may have failed:
$ $ $
Coolant temperature gauge Rev counter Cruise control and Speedtronic displays
338
Practical advice
Display messages
Display symbol
Display message
TC SHIFT ABORTED TC SHIFT CONDITIONS NOT FULFILLED TC IN NEUTRAL TRANSFER CASE VISIT WORKSHOP!
Possible cause
Possible solution
The gearshifting process was abort- Carry out the gearshifting procedure again ed because of an error. (5 page 170). One or more transfer case shift con- Carry out the gearshifting procedure again ditions have not been met. (5 page 170). The transfer case is in neutral. The transfer case is faulty.

Shift the transfer case to the HIGH or LOW shift range as required (5 page 170). Do not perform any transfer case gearshifts. Have the transfer case checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
339
Practical advice
Where will I find...?
Warning triangle, first-aid kit and vehicle tool kit Long-wheelbase station wagon Warning triangle The warning triangle is secured underneath the rear bench seat. P58.00-2031-31 aus Ba. 209 Setting up the warning triangle
i
Check the expiry dates on the first-aid kit contents once a year and replace them if necessary. Observe national legal requirements when setting up the warning triangle. Comply with the safety precautions in the "Flat tyre" section (5 page 367) when using the jack.
P58.10-2059-31 1 Stand 2 Reflectors 3 Press stud

Fold stand 1 out to the sides. Pull reflectors 2 upwards to form a triangle. Secure reflectors 2 using press-stud 3.
1 Warning triangle 2 Retainers

Open retainers 2 and remove warning triangle 1.
340
Practical advice
First-aid kit The first-aid kit is located in the stowage well in the driver's door. Vehicle tool kit The vehicle tool kit is located under a cover in the rear footwell. Jack The jack is underneath the rear bench seat.
P86.10-2087-31
P86.10-2061-31
P86.10-2062-31
1 First-aid kit
1 Cover 2 Vehicle tool kit wallet

Fold cover 1 to the side. Pull the vehicle tool kit 2 out by the tab.
1 Cover 2 Retainer 3 Jack

Fold the rear bench seat forwards (5 page 100). Open cover 1. Open retainer 2 and remove jack 3.
341
Practical advice
Short-wheelbase station wagon Warning triangle and vehicle tool kit The warning triangle and the vehicle tool kit are located in the luggage compartment behind the left-hand side trim.

Take out warning triangle 2 or vehicle tool kit 3.

Open cover 1. Take out first-aid kit 2.
i
Setting up the warning triangle (5 page 340). First-aid kit The first-aid kit is located in the luggage compartment behind the right-hand side trim.
i
Short-wheelbase station wagon with stowage boxes*: The warning triangle and the vehicle tool kit are located in the left-hand stowage box. The first-aid kit is located in the right-hand stowage box.
P58.10-2060-31
1 Cover 2 Warning triangle 3 Vehicle tool kit wallet

P86.10-2063-31
Open cover 1. 1 Cover 2 First-aid kit
342
Practical advice
Jack The jack is located under a cover in front of the front-passenger seat.

Move the seat back (5 page 28). Remove pins 1 from sockets 2. Remove sockets 2 from cover 3. Remove cover 3. P58.10-2072-31
P58.10-2073-31 1 Strap 2 Retainer 3 Jack 1 Pins 2 Sockets 3 Cover

Pull strap 1 upwards and unhook it from retainer 2. Remove jack 3.
343
Practical advice
Cabriolet Warning triangle, first-aid kit and vehicle tool kit The warning triangle, the first-aid kit and the vehicle tool kit are located in the tailgate under a cover.

Fold handle 1 out in the direction of the arrow. Turn handle 1 clockwise and fold cover 2 upwards in the direction of the arrow.
Take out warning triangle 1, first-aid kit 2 or vehicle tool kit 3.
i
Setting up the warning triangle (5 page 340). Jack The jack is located under a cover in front of the front-passenger seat (5 page 343).
P86.10-2065-31 P86.10-2064-31
1 Handle 2 Cover

1 Warning triangle 2 First-aid kit 3 Vehicle tool kit wallet
Open the tailgate (5 page 89).
344
Practical advice
Fire extinguisher* The fire extinguisher is located at the front under the driver's seat.

Pull lug 1 upwards. Take out fire extinguisher 2.
CD changer* The CD changer is located in the left-hand side of the luggage compartment.
i
Refill the fire extinguisher after each use. Have the fire extinguisher checked every one or two years, otherwise it may not work in an emergency. Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned.
P68.00-3018-31
P82.64-2350-31
1 Lug 2 Fire extinguisher
CD changer
i
See the separate Operating Instructions when using the CD changer.
345
Practical advice
Spare wheel The spare wheel is located under a cover on the outside of the rear door. Removing the cover

Unlock cover rim 1 using key 2 from the glove compartment. Fold retainer 3 down. P40.10-2715-31
P40.10-3384-31 P40.10-3391-31 5 Catch 6 Recess
i
4 Cover plate 1 Cover rim 2 Key 3 Retainer

Stretch out cover rim 1 (arrows) and remove it. Pull cover plate 4 off towards you.
When replacing cover plate 4, make sure that catch 5 engages in recess 6.
346
Practical advice
Removing the spare wheel Fitting the spare wheel Cabriolet
i
Once you have changed the wheel, secure the damaged wheel to the spare wheel bracket. Make sure that the wheel cannot work loose. Cover the wheel with the spare wheel cover provided. See the notes in the "Flat tyre" section when changing a wheel (5 page 367).
P40.10-2716-31
P40.10-3117-31
1 Securing bolts

Remove securing bolts 1. Remove the spare wheel.
1 Valve 2 Spare wheel bracket
Risk of injury
Make sure that nobody can be injured as the spare wheel is removed.
Secure the spare wheel to spare wheel bracket 2 in such a way that valve 1 is accessible for checking the tyre pressure.
347
Practical advice
Opening/closing in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked using the remote control in the key, use the emergency key element. On the Cabriolet, you can use the emergency key element to unlock the driver's door, and on the station wagon you can unlock the rear door and the driver's door. Unlocking the driver's door Unlocking the rear door
P80.20-2393-31
P72.12-2482-31
i
The anti-theft alarm system* is triggered if you open the vehicle using the emergency key element (5 page 76). There are two ways of disabling the alarm:
$ $
1 Release slide 2 Emergency key element (mechanical)

3 Locked 4 Unlocked

Press the or button on the key. Insert the key into the ignition lock.
Simultaneously pull release slide 1 in the direction of the arrow and pull out emergency key element 2. Insert emergency key element 2 in the door lock to the stop, and turn it anti-clockwise. The driver's door is unlocked.
Insert emergency key element 2 into the door lock to the stop, and turn it anti-clockwise. The rear door is unlocked.
348
Practical advice
Changing the batteries If the remote control batteries are discharged, you can only lock and unlock the vehicle manually using the emergency key element (5 page 348). If the batteries for the auxiliary heating* remote control are discharged, you can only switch the auxiliary heating* on and off using the buttons in the vehicle (5 page 193). It is then advisable to have the batteries changed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Risk of poisoning
i
Only replace the batteries in pairs. You can obtain suitable batteries from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. You can also have batteries changed there and return old batteries. Retail outlets are legally obliged to take back old batteries.
Batteries contain poisonous and caustic substances. You should therefore keep batteries away from children. If a battery is swallowed, consult a doctor immediately.
Environmental note
Do not dispose of batteries with the household rubbish. Return discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, or at a special collection point for old batteries.
349
Practical advice
Key

Slide battery compartment 3 out in the direction of the arrow. Remove the old batteries from the key.
i
When inserting the batteries, make sure that they are clean and lint-free. Then check that the buttons on the key are working.
P80.35-2150-31 P80.35-2151-31
1 Release slide 2 Emergency key element (mechanical) 3 Battery compartment

Press release slide 1 in the direction of the arrow and pull out emergency key element 2. Press emergency key element 2 in the direction of the arrow into the opening. Battery compartment 3 is unlocked.
4 Batteries 5 Contact spring

Insert new batteries 4 with the positive terminal facing upwards under contact spring 5. Press battery compartment 3 back into the key housing.
350
Practical advice
Auxiliary heating remote control* If the batteries in the remote control are almost discharged, the indicator lamp lights up when you press the:
$ $
Insert new batteries 2. Note the terminal markings in the remote control casing. Slide battery cover 1 back onto the remote control. Check the auxiliary heating functions in the vehicle using the remote control.
ON button in green OFF button in red
P 83.70-3798-31 aus R230

and then briefly lights up in orange. If the batteries are discharged, the indicator lamp lights up in orange when you press the buttons. 1 Battery cover 2 Batteries

i
When inserting the batteries, make sure that they are clean and lint-free.
Slide off battery cover 1. Remove batteries 2.
351
Practical advice
Fuel filler flap emergency release Station wagon The emergency release is located in the luggage compartment behind the rear panel trim.
i
On vehicles with stowage boxes*, the securing bolts in the stowage box must be removed first.
Cabriolet The emergency release is located in the left-hand side of the luggage compartment.
P80.20-2396-31 P80.20-2395-31 P80.20-2394-31
3 Release band 1 Edge protection 2 Rear panel trim

1 Release pin

Pull band 3 upwards. The fuel filler flap is released and can be opened.
Pull release pin 1 upwards. The fuel filler flap is released and can be opened.
Open the rear door. Pull edge protection 1 away from the door pillar. Remove rear panel trim 2.
352
Practical advice
Sliding sunroof* Opening/closing the sliding sunroof manually The drive is in the luggage compartment behind the rear panel trim.

Remove rear panel trim 2.

i
On vehicles with stowage boxes*, the securing bolts in the stowage box must be removed first.
Insert key 3 into the hexagon head bolt on the drive. Insert screwdriver 4 into the key as a lever.
Opening

Turn the key anti-clockwise.
Closing

Turn the key clockwise.
P77.10-2016-31
P77.10-2017-31
1 Edge protection 2 Rear panel trim

3 Key (vehicle tool kit) 4 Screwdriver (vehicle tool kit)
Open the rear door. Pull edge protection 1 away from the door pillar.
353
Practical advice
Cabriolet soft top Closing the Cabriolet soft top manually Always ask a second person to help when opening/closing the Cabriolet soft top manually. Do not wear any jewellery such as watches, rings or bracelets when doing this. Risk of injury

Move the selector lever to position P. Apply the parking brake. Remove the key from the ignition lock. Fold the sun visors down.

Swing release levers 1 and 2 down (arrows). Open the front-passenger door.
P77.00-2121-31 P77.00-2120-31
Make sure that nobody can be trapped or injured by moving parts such as the soft top frame as you open or close the soft top.
See the notes on the Cabriolet soft top in the "Controls in detail" section (5 page 201).
1 Left-hand release lever 2 Right-hand release lever
3 Door seal 4 Side trim

Pull door seal 3 out a little. Remove right-hand side trim 4.
354
Practical advice
P77.00-2122-31
P77.00-2123-31
P77.00-2124-31
5 Hexagon head bolt (emergency valve)

6 Locking mechanism

7 Handle

Turn the hexagon head bolt to the stop in the direction of the arrow using the key (vehicle tool kit).
Simultaneously press lock 6 in the direction of the arrow on both sides of the vehicle, and raise the Cabriolet soft top. Fold the Cabriolet soft top fully out to the front.
Using handle 7, pull the Cabriolet soft top downwards until you hear at least one of release levers 1 or 2 engage. Swing this release lever upwards. Swing the second release lever upwards.

355
Practical advice
Releasing the parking lock manually In the event of a malfunction, you can release the selector lever lock from position P manually, for example to tow the vehicle.

Guide lever 1 into the opening with retraction protection. Press the lever downwards and at the same time shift the selector lever to position P. Pull out the lever.
i
P27.60-2297-31 The protective cap will only close again completely when you briefly press the selector lever towards D.
1 Lever
356
Practical advice
Changing bulbs Changing bulbs
Bulbs and lights are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that all the bulbs are in good order at all times. Risk of injury Front bulbs Rear bulbs
P54.00-2360-31
P54.00-2429-31
Bulbs and lights can become very hot. You should therefore allow them to cool down before you change them. Keep bulbs out of the reach of children. Never use a bulb which has been dropped. Such a bulb may explode and injure you.
Bulb 2 Turn signal

1
Type P 21 W H4 60/55 W
Bulb 1 Third brake lamp 2 Turn signal 3 Reversing lamp Brake lamp
Type LEDs PY 21 W (yellow) P 21 W P 21 W C 5 W (festoon lamp) P 21 W
1 Additional turn signal LEDs 3 Main-beam and dipped-beam headlamp Side/parking lamp 4 Front foglamp
W4W H3 55 W
Tail and parking lamps W 5 W 4 Licence plate illumination 5 Rear foglamp
1 Vehicles with white light lenses* PY 21 W (yellow).
357
Practical advice
Changing bulbs
Before changing bulbs
$ $ $ $ $
Only fit 12-volt bulbs of the same type as before and of the correct wattage. Switch the lights off before changing a bulb to avoid a short-circuit. Only hold bulbs with a clean, lint-free cloth. Do not work with wet or greasy fingers.
$
If the the new bulb does not light up either, visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Have the LEDs changed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre. The following lamps are LEDs:
$ $ $
Changing the front bulbs
i
Have the headlamp adjustment checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Do not turn the headlamp adjustment screws. If the adjustment screws have been turned, you must have the headlamp adjustment checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre.
the additional turn signals in the exterior mirrors the locator lighting bulbs in the exterior mirrors the third brake lamp
358
Practical advice
Changing bulbs
Removing the headlamps
P82.10-3236-31 P82.10-3237-31
P82.10-3238-31
4 Sealing ring (headlamp)

Left headlamp, mirror image of right

1 Securing screws (headlamp surround) 2 Headlamp surround 3 Headlamp

Remove sealing ring 4 from the headlamp (see arrow).
5 Adjustment screws (headlamp) 6 Securing screws (headlamp)

Undo securing screws 6. Remove 3.
Undo securing screws 1. Remove headlamp surround 2 upwards (see arrow).
359
Practical advice
Changing bulbs
Changing the bulbs Main-beam/dipped-beam headlamps

Remove protective cap 1. Detach connector 3. Unclip retainer spring 4. Remove bulb 5. Insert new bulb 5 into the holder so that the base locates in the recess. Clip in retainer spring 4. Attach connector 3 to bulb 5. Press on protective cap 1.
P82.10-3083-31 P82.10-3082-31

1 Protective cap 2 Connector (side/parking lamp) 3 Connector (main-beam/dipped-beam headlamp)
4 Retainer spring 5 Main-beam/dipped-beam headlamp 6 Side/parking lamp
360
Practical advice
Changing bulbs
Side/parking lamps

Front foglamps Removing

Undo securing screws 1. Remove foglamp surround 2.
Detach connector 2 from bulb 6. Press bulb 6 gently, turn it anti-clockwise and remove it. Insert new bulb 6. To do this, press bulb 6 gently and turn it clockwise until it engages. Attach connector 2 to bulb 6.
P82.10-3084-31
P82.10-3085-31
Right front foglamp, mirror image of left
4 Securing screws (front foglamp) 5 Adjustment screws (headlamp)

1 Securing screws (headlamp surround) 2 Foglamp surround 3 Front foglamps
Undo securing screws 4. Remove foglamp 3.
361
Practical advice
Changing bulbs
Changing the bulb

Detach connector 6. Unclip retainer spring 7. Remove bulb holder 8 along with the bulb. Insert new bulb 8 into the holder so that the base locates in recess. Refit the bulb holder. Clip in retainer spring 7. Reattach connector 6.
Turn signals Removing the lens
P82.10-3086-31
P82.10-3091-31
6 Connector 7 Retainer spring 8 Bulb holder
1 Securing screws 2 Lens

Undo securing screws 1. Remove lens 2.
362
Practical advice
Changing bulbs
Changing the bulbs

Press bulb 3 gently, turn it anti-clockwise and remove it. Insert the new bulb. To do this, press the bulb gently and turn it clockwise until it engages.
Changing the rear bulbs Rear lamp units Removing the lens
P82.10-3092-31
!
Do not overtighten securing screws 1. You could otherwise damage lens 2. P82.10-3087-31
3 Bulb
1 Securing screws 2 Lens

363
Practical advice
Changing bulbs
Changing the bulbs Reversing lamp/rear foglamp Removing the lens Changing the bulbs
P82.10-3088-31 P82.10-3089-31
P82.10-3090-31
3 Turn signal 4 Tail lamp 5 Brake lamp

3 Bulb 1 Securing screws 2 Lens

Press bulb 3 gently, turn it anti-clockwise and remove it. Insert the new bulb. To do this, press the bulb gently and turn it clockwise until it engages.
Press the bulb gently, turn it anti-clockwise and remove it. Insert the new bulb. To do this, press the bulb gently and turn it clockwise until it engages.
364
Practical advice
Changing bulbs
Licence plate illumination Removing Changing the bulb
P82.10-3094-31 P82.10-3093-31
3 Lamp 1 Securing screws 2 Bulb holder with lens

Remove bulb 3 from bulb holder 2. Insert the new bulb.
Undo securing screws 1. Remove bulb holder 2.
365
Practical advice
Replacing the wiper blades
Removing

Risk of injury
Fitting
Remove the key from the ignition lock before replacing the wiper blades. The windscreen wipers could otherwise be set in motion and injure you.
Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen until you feel it engage. Position the wiper blade at rightangles. P82.30-2190-31
!
Never open the bonnet if a wiper arm is folded forwards. Do not fold the wiper arms back onto the windscreen without a fitted wiper blade. For your own convenience, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 1 Locking spring 2 Wiper blade 3 Wiper arm 4 Joint piece

P82.30-2189-31

Guide wiper blade 2 with recess into wiper arm 3. Slide new wiper blade 2 into wiper arm 3. Let locking spring 1 clip into the end of the wiper arm.
Press locking spring 1 and slide wiper blade 2 out of wiper arm 3 along with joint piece 4.
366
Practical advice
Flat tyre Flat tyre
Changing a wheel and fitting the spare wheel Risk of accident

Straighten the wheels and engage the steering wheel lock. Apply the parking brake. Move the selector lever to position P. If necessary, passengers should leave the vehicle, ensuring that they are not endangered as they do so. Place the warning triangle or warning lights at a suitable distance. Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned when doing so.
The vehicle must be placed on stands if you intend to work under it. Make sure that the jack is placed on a firm and level surface. Use a stable and non-slip support plate for the jack if the surface is soft or loose. Prepare the vehicle as described. Do not start the engine while the wheel is being changed. Do not lie under the vehicle when it is raised with the jack. If the vehicle is not raised as described, it could slip from the jack as a result of vibrations (e.g. starting the engine, opening and closing a door or the rear door).
Vehicles with AMG equipment: When fitting the spare wheel you must observe the following:
$ $
the maximum speed of 80 km/h the specified tyre pressure
Preparing the vehicle

Try to park the vehicle away from traffic and on a firm, level surface. Switch on the hazard warning lamps. Deactivate the automatic door locking function.
Risk of injury
The jack is designed only to raise the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is changed.
367
Practical advice
Flat tyre
Raising the vehicle

Prevent the vehicle from rolling away using chocks or similar.

$
On a level road: Place the chocks in front of and behind the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
P40.10-2178-31
P58.10-2061-31
On uphill gradients: Place chocks behind both wheels on the other axle.
Wheel wrench

Pump lever (three-part)

Take out the vehicle tool kit and the jack (5 page 340). Remove the spare wheel from the spare wheel bracket (5 page 346).
Loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one turn using the wheel wrench. Do not undo the wheel bolts.
1 Flattened end

Assemble the pump lever for the jack. It can be found in the vehicle tool kit.
368
Practical advice
Flat tyre
Removing the wheel

Undo the wheel bolts.
!
P58.10-2062-31 P40.10-2719-31 Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. This could damage the bolt and wheel hub threads.

Remove the wheel.
Jack
2 Pressure release screw

Fit the jack to the axle carrier tube of the front or rear axle. The jack must always stand vertically, even on slopes. Raise the vehicle by pumping (arrow) until the wheel is raised a maximum of 3 cm from the ground.
Fitting the wheel

Close pressure release screw 2. To do this, turn it clockwise to the stop using flattened end 1 of the pump lever.
Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. Push the wheel onto the wheel hub and press it on. Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten 55 them finger-tight.
i
Do not turn pressure release screw 2 by more than one or two turns. Hydraulic fluid could otherwise leak out.
369
Practical advice
Flat tyre
Lowering the vehicle

Risk of accident
Replace damaged or corroded wheel bolts. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. If a wheel hub thread is damaged, you must not drive the vehicle. Inform a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or Service 24h. Only use wheel bolts that are suitable for the wheel and the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for safety reasons, you only use wheel bolts that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Other bolts could work loose. Do not tighten the wheel bolts while the vehicle is raised. The vehicle could tip.

Open the pressure release screw of the jack by approximately one turn using the pump lever (5 page 368). Put the jack to one side.
Risk of accident
Have the tightening torque checked immediately following a wheel change. The wheel bolts may work loose if they are not tightened to a tightening torque of 130 Nm.

P40.10-2720-31
Push the jack's piston back down and tighten the pressure release screw. Stow away the jack and the rest of the vehicle tool kit.
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in the sequence indicated from 1 to 5.
370
Practical advice
Flat tyre

Once you have changed the wheel, secure the damaged wheel to the spare wheel bracket (5 page 347). Make sure that the wheel cannot work loose. Cover the wheel with the spare wheel cover provided. Check the tyre pressure and correct it if necessary. There is a table stating tyre pressure levels for your vehicle on the inside of the vehicle's fuel filler flap.
Spare wheel When replacing tyres on the vehicle, you can include the spare wheel as a road wheel if:
$ $
Risk of accident

it is less than six years old the wheel and tyre are of the same design as the road wheels
If the spare wheel is more than six years old or is of a different design to the road wheels: have the spare wheel replaced with a new wheel at the nearest qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Never drive the vehicle with more than one spare wheel fitted. Vehicles with different tyre dimensions on the front and rear axles: the wheel and tyre sizes of the spare wheel and the normal wheel are different. If you are using the spare wheel, the handling characteristics are affected. Do not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h.
371
Practical advice
Battery
The battery is under a cover in the rear footwell. The battery must always be sufficiently charged so that it achieves its intended service life. Have the battery charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it parked for an extended period. To prevent corrosion damage, only replace the battery with one that has a central vent cover. Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for safety reasons, you only use batteries that have been specially tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. If you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for an extended period, please obtain advice from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Risk of injury
Risk of injury
Wear eye protection.
Comply with safety precautions and protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion
Keep children away. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when the battery is being handled. Avoid creating sparks. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Immediately rinse acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
Observe this Owner's Manual.
372
Practical advice
Battery
Environmental note
Risk of injury
Risk of injury
$
Do not dispose of batteries with the household rubbish. Dispose of a defective battery in an environmentally-responsible manner. Take it to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or a special collection point for old batteries.
To prevent acid burns, please observe the following safety notes when handling batteries:
$ $
Do not touch the battery first. To remove any electrostatic charge, first get out of the vehicle and touch the bodywork. Do not rub the battery with cloths. The electrostatic charge could cause the battery to explode when you touch it or if a spark arcs over.
Do not lean over the battery. Do not place any metal objects on a battery. You could otherwise cause a short circuit and the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery could ignite. Make sure you do not become electrostatically charged, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or by friction with other textiles. Do not therefore slide the battery over carpet or other synthetic materials.
Risk of injury
G
$
Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for safety reasons, you only use batteries that have been specially tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. The batteries are more impact-resistant so that occupants are not burnt by acid if the battery is damaged in an accident.
373
Practical advice
Battery !
Switch off the engine and remove the key before you loosen or disconnect the terminal clamps. You may otherwise destroy electronic components such as the alternator. Have the starter battery checked and, if necessary, replaced every two years or 20,000 km at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. If your vehicle is fitted with TeleAid*, you must set the telephone to service mode (5 page 237). Your vehicle is fitted with one battery. It is located under a cover in the rear footwell. Disconnecting the battery Risk of accident
When the battery is disconnected:
$
Apply the parking brake and move the selector lever to P. Switch all electrical consumers off. Turn the key to position 0 and remove it. Loosen the negative terminal clamp and remove it. The terminal clamp must no longer be touching the terminal.

you do not have any brake boosting effect. You will require more effort to brake and the brake pedal travel will be longer. If necessary, you will have to depress the brake pedal with maximum force you cannot turn the ignition key the selector lever is locked in position P
$ $

Remove the cover from the positive terminal. Loosen the positive terminal clamp and remove it. Remove the breather hose from the battery.
!
Always disconnect the battery in the order described below. You could otherwise damage the vehicle electronics.
374
Practical advice
Battery
Removing the battery Have the battery removed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Charging and installing the battery Risk of injury Have the battery charged at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. If you charge the battery yourself, follow the operating instructions for your battery charger.
Risk of acid burns
There is a risk of acid burns during the charging process due to the gases which escape from the battery. Do not lean over the battery.
!
Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 volts.
Never charge the battery when it is fitted in the vehicle. The vehicle electronics may otherwise be damaged. As the battery is being charged, gases can escape and generate minor explosions, which can injure you and others and may cause damage to the paintwork or acid corrosion on the vehicle. Do not lean over the battery while it is being charged.
375
Practical advice
Battery
Connecting the battery

!
Always connect the battery in the order described below. Never swap the terminal clamps. You could otherwise damage the vehicle electronics.

Attach the positive terminal and secure its cover. Connect the negative terminal. Fit the breather hose. Make sure that the battery is fitted with a stopper on the opposite side to the breather hose.
i
If the power supply has been interrupted (e.g. by disconnecting and reconnecting the battery), you must carry out the following tasks:
$ $ $
Set the clock (5 page 142) Readjust the front seat head restraints (5 page 96) Reset ESP, ABS and BAS (5 page 320)
Switch all electrical consumers off.
376
Practical advice
Jump-starting Jump-starting
Jump-starting If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be started from another vehicle using jump leads. Observe the following points:
$
i
You can obtain jump leads with polarity reversal protection, e.g. from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Risk of explosion
Avoid creating sparks. Keep naked flames away from the battery and do not smoke. Comply with safety precautions and special protective measures when handling the battery (5 page 372).

Jump-starting must only be performed when the engine and catalytic converter are cold. Do not start the engine if the battery has frozen. Let the battery thaw first. Only use batteries with the same nominal voltage for jump-starting. Only use jump leads that are protected against polarity reversal and which have an adequate cross-section and insulated battery terminal clamps.
!
Only jump-start the battery in the engine compartment. Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Never start the vehicle using a rapid battery charger.
$ $ $
Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Apply the parking brake and move the selector lever to P. Switch all electrical consumers off.
55
Risk of acid burns
Do not lean over the battery while the engine is being jump-started.
377
Practical advice
Jump-starting
The jump-starting contacts are in the engine compartment.

Remove cover 1 from the positive terminal and likewise on the donor vehicle. Connect positive terminals 2 of both batteries with the jump lead. Start with the second battery. Run the donor vehicle's engine at idling speed. Connect negative terminals 3 of both batteries with the jump lead. Start with the second battery.
Start the engine. You can now switch the electrical consumers back on, but do not switch on the lights.
P54.10-2183-31

First disconnect the jump lead from negative terminals 3 of the batteries, and then from positive terminals 2. Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre.
1 Cover 2 Positive terminal (+) 3 Negative terminal ()
378
Practical advice
Towing Towing
Risk of accident Having the vehicle carried away on a transporter or trailer is preferable to towing it away. If possible, use a towing bar when you are towing the vehicle away. Observe national legal requirements when towing your vehicle.
i
Before towing, deactivate the automatic door locking function (5 page 150). You could otherwise become locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. You must not tow-start the vehicle. The battery must be connected and charged when towing the vehicle, otherwise:
$ $
Have the vehicle towed using a rigid towing bar if:

$ $
the engine is not running there is a malfunction in the power supply or the vehicle's electrical system
!
You may tow the vehicle a maximum of 50 km. A maximum towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. If the transfer case can be shifted to the N neutral position, you can tow the vehicle over a longer distance. If you are towing the vehicle with a raised axle, turn the ignition to 1.
There is no servo assistance for the steering and braking when the engine is not running. You will then need significantly greater force to steer the vehicle and brake. Do not tow the vehicle away if the key cannot be turned in the ignition lock. The steering is then locked and the vehicle cannot be steered. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the permissible gross weight of your vehicle (5 page 401).
you will not be able to switch on the ignition you will not be able to move the selector lever to N
379
Practical advice
Towing
If the engine does not start:
$ $
Front towing eye The towing eye is located at the front under the bumper on the left when viewed in the direction of travel.
Rear towing eye The towing eye is located at the rear under the bumper on the left when viewed in the direction of travel.
jump-starting may be performed notify a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
!
Secure the towing cable or the towing bar to the towing eyes only. You could otherwise damage the vehicle.
P00.60-2025-31
P00.60-2026-31
1 Towing eye
1 Towing eye
380
Practical advice
Towing
Towing the vehicle Transporting the vehicle The towing eyes can be used to pull the vehicle onto a special transporter or trailer for transportation.

Tow-starting Petrol engine vehicles Your vehicle is supplied with automatic transmission. This means that the engine cannot be tow-started. If the engine does not start, try jump starting (5 page 377). Towing in the event of various malfunctions In the event of engine damage, trans mission damage or electrical malfunc tioning,

!
Do not tow the vehicle further than 50 km. Do not exceed the maximum speed of 50 km/h. You could otherwise damage the transmission.

Switch on the ignition. Shift the selector lever to position N. Shift the transfer case to the neutral position N. Only lash the vehicle by the wheels/ rims, and not by the chassis parts such as transverse links or trailing arms. You could otherwise damage the vehicle.
Switch on the ignition. Move the selector lever to N.
i
The transmission can only change gear if the battery is sufficiently charged. If you cannot move the selector lever to N, the propeller shaft connected to the driven axles must be removed.
Move the selector lever to position N (5 page 166). Shift the transfer case to neutral position N (5 page 170).
381
Practical advice
Towing
With transfer case damage The propeller shafts connected to the driven axles must be removed. With front axle damage The front axle must be raised for towing. The propeller shaft between the rear axle and the transfer case must be removed. With rear axle damage If the rear axle is raised, the vehicle may only be towed with wheel rollers under the front axle. Towing out a vehicle that is stuck Take great care when towing out a vehicle whose drive wheels have become embedded in loose earth or mud, particularly if the vehicle is laden. Do not jolt the vehicle or tow it at an angle. You could otherwise damage the chassis. Never attempt to tow out a vehicle with a trailer attached. If possible, tow out vehicles backwards along the track it took previously.
!
When the propeller shafts are refitted, new self-locking screw nuts must be used.
i
You can obtain information on this from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
382
Practical advice
Fuses
Fuses To the left of the cockpit you will find the main fuse box with:
$ $ $
Main fuse box Opening
!
Use only fuses with the amperage recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre will be happy to advise you. Do not attempt to repair or bridge faulty fuses. Have the cause determined and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
a fuse allocation chart spare fuses a fuse extractor under the cockpit in the front-passenger footwell in the transmission tunnel in the battery compartment
Additional fuses are located:

$ $ $
P54.15-2380-31
1 Cover

Open the driver's door. Remove cover 1 in the direction of the arrow.
383
Practical advice
Fuses
Fuse box in the front-passenger foot well

Undo screws 1. Remove cover 2 (arrow). P54.15-2383-31 P54.15-2382-31 5 Fuse box 6 Screws
i
We recommend that you have fuses changed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Opening
P54.15-2381-31
3 Screws 4 Cover

You can fold fuse box 5 down a little to make it easier to change the fuse:

Undo screws 3. Remove cover 4 (arrow).
Undo screws 6. Fold fuse box 5 downwards.
1 Screws 2 Cover
384
Practical advice
Fuses
Fuse box in the transmission tunnel Removing the stop clamps Risk of injury
i
We recommend that you have fuses changed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Long-wheelbase station wagon: you must remove the stop clamps on the front-passenger seat to reach the fuse box.
G
P54.15-2384-31
Do not drive if the stop clamps are not installed correctly. If you sit too close to the airbag, you could be seriously or fatally injured. Please observe the information about passenger safety (5 page 46).
The stop clamps are located at the front on the seat rails.
Stop clamp on the right-hand seat rail; the left-hand stop clamp is a mirror image of this
1 Stop clamp 2 Distance

Remove stop clamps 1 using a screwdriver.
!
Retain correct distance 2 when fitting the stop clamps.
385
Practical advice
Fuses
Opening the fuse box Fuses in the battery compartment The battery compartment is located under a cover in the rear footwell. The fuses in the battery compartment do not normally need to be changed. Visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, if a fuse needs to be changed.
P54.15-2484-31
1 Screws 2 Cover

Move the front-passenger seat to its foremost position. Undo screws 1. Remove cover 2 (arrow).
386
Technical data
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Vehicle electronics Vehicle identification plates Trailer tow hitch Engine Speeds Tyres and wheels Vehicle dimensions Vehicle weights Trailer loads Service products and capacities Frequencies for garage door openers*
387
Technical data
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
The "Technical data" section contains all the necessary technical data for your vehicle. Some of the values given are provisional or calculated. Final values and missing data were not available at the time this manual went to print. Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts, conversion parts and accessories which have been approved for your vehicle in terms of their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to guarantee other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been independently or officially approved. In Germany and other countries, certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification work if they comply with legal requirements. All genuine Mercedes-Benz parts satisfy these regulations. Make sure that replacement parts are suitable for your vehicle. In many countries, parts that constitute a modification to the vehicle could invalidate the general operating permit. This is the case if:
$ $ $
the type of vehicle approved in the general operating permit has changed it will endanger road users it has a detrimental effect on exhaust emissions or vehicle noise levels
The use of non-approved parts could jeopardise vehicle safety. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz recommends only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts and conversion parts and accessories which have been approved for your vehicle.
388
Technical data
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Environmental note
Mercedes-Benz also supplies reconditioned assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. These parts have the same warranty as new parts.
You can obtain genuine Mercedes-Benz parts and approved conversion parts and accessories from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Here you will receive advice about technical modifications, and the parts will be professionally fitted. Always quote the vehicle identification number and the engine number when ordering genuine parts. You will find these numbers on the vehicle data card in the Service Booklet or on your vehicle's identification plates (5 page 392).
389
Technical data
Vehicle electronics
Tampering with the engine electronics Risk of accident
Only have the engine electronics and associated parts serviced at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Road safety could otherwise be affected.
Only have maintenance work on the engine electronics and associated parts such as control units, sensors or connector leads carried out only at a qualified specialist workshop. The vehicle parts may otherwise wear more quickly and the vehicle warranty and general operating permit may be invalidated.
Retrofitting electrical or electronic equipment Electrical and electronic equipment can jeopardise the operational safety of your vehicle. If equipment of this kind is retrofitted, it must be type-approved and bear the e mark. You can obtain the e mark from the equipment manufacturer or an authorised testing centre. If you wish to install telephones or two-way radios in the vehicle, you must obtain formal approval. Mercedes-Benz permits mobile phones and two-way radios to be installed if they are fitted professionally and an exterior aerial is fitted so as to be reflection-free. The transmission output of the telephone or two-way radio must not exceed the maximum transmission outputs listed below.
390
Technical data
Vehicle electronics
Risk of accident
Mobile phones and two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics, thereby jeopardising the operational safety of the vehicle and your own safety, if:
$ $ $
you do not have an exterior aerial the exterior aerial is not reflection-free the exterior aerial is incorrectly fitted
Therefore, have the exterior aerial installed only at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Frequency range Short wave (< 50 MHz) 4 m band 2 m band 70 cm band 25 cm band
Maximum trans mission output 100 W 20 W 50 W 35 W 10 W
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation could also damage your health.
!
If electrical or electronic equipment which does not fulfil these conditions is retrofitted, the vehicle's general operating permit may be invalidated (EU Directive 95/54/EC).
391
Technical data
Vehicle identification plates
P00.00-3294-31
392
Technical data
Vehicle identification plates
Vehicle identification plate 1 Engine number G 270 CDI
Location On the side of the engine block (on the left when viewed in the direction of travel)
2 Engine numbers G 320, G500, G55 AMG, G 400 CDI On the rear of the engine block (on the right when viewed in the direction of travel) 3 Vehicle identification plate 4 Body plate 5 Vehicle identification number 6 Fuel grade details 7 Tyre pressure table On the door frame (on the left when viewed in the direction of travel) On the front bulkhead cover under the air intake (on the right when viewed in the direction of travel) In the wheel housing on the chassis (on the right when viewed in the direction of travel) In the fuel filler flap (on the right when viewed in the direction of travel) In the fuel filler flap (on the right when viewed in the direction of travel)
393
Technical data
Trailer tow hitch
Installation dimensions
Risk of accident
!
Observe securing points 1 on the chassis frame when retrofitting a trailer tow hitch. Maximum permissible overhang dimension 2 is 895 mm. You may obtain further information on retrofitting from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
P31.10-2616-31
Have the trailer tow hitch retrofitted only at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
394
Technical data
Engine Engine
i
The technical data was determined in accordance with EU Directives. All data applies to the vehicle's standard equipment. The data may therefore differ for vehicles with optional equipment. You may obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Engine Rated output at engine speed Rated torque at engine speed Number of cylinders Displacement Maximum engine speed G 320 5,600 rpm 300 Nm
i
You will find information about the noise level of your vehicle in your registration document.
G 500 5,500 rpm 456 Nm 2,800 4,000 8 cm3 4,966 cm3 6,300 rpm
G 55 AMG 6,100 rpm 700 Nm 2,650 4,500 8 5,439 cm3 6,500 rpm
G 270 CDI 3,800 rpm 400 Nm 1,800 2,600 5 2,685 cm3 4,400 rpm
G 400 CDI 4,000 rpm 560 Nm 1,700 2,600 8 3,996 cm3 4,750 rpm
158 KW (215 bhp) 218 KW (296 bhp) 350 KW (476 bhp) 115 KW (156 bhp) 184 KW (250 bhp)
2,800 4,800 6 3,199 6,300 rpm
395
Technical data
Performance
Speeds
i
The technical data was determined in accordance with EU Directives. All data applies to the vehicle's standard equipment. The data may therefore differ for vehicles with optional equipment. You may obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Maximum speed 1st gear 2nd gear 3rd gear 4th gear 5th gear G 320 50 km/h 81 km/h 132 km/h 175 km/h 160 km/h G 500 61 km/h 101 km/h 161 km/h 190 km/h 190 km/h G 55 AMG 74 km/h 122 km/h 190 km/h 205 km/h 210 km/h G 270 CDI 41 km/h 67 km/h 109 km/h 149 km/h 160 km/h G 400 CDI 45 km/h 74 km/h 125 km/h 177 km/h 182 km/h
396
Technical data
Tyres and wheels Tyres and wheels
Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for safety reasons, you use tyres that have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These tyres are specially suited for use with control systems such as ABS or ESP. If you use other tyres, Mercedes-Benz cannot be held responsible for any damage that may occur. You may obtain information about tyres from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
!
Fitting tyres other than those approved and recommended by Mercedes-Benz could have the following adverse effects:
$ $ $
i
Only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. You may obtain further information on tyres and wheels from any MercedesBenz Service Centre. You will find a table of tyre pressures for warm and cold tyres on the inside of the vehicle's fuel filler flap. Only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. Speed index for tyres The speed index is part of the tyre designation. It indicates the speed range for which a tyre is suitable. Abbre viation S H V Speed up to 180 km/h up to 210 km/h up to 240 km/h
Poorer handling characteristics Louder noise Increased fuel consumption
In addition, tyres and wheels that have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz may be too big or may deform under load. This may cause the tyres and wheels to scrape on the bodywork axle components and damage the tyres or the vehicle.
397
Technical data
Tyres and wheels
Tyres G 3204 Tyres Light-alloy wheel Tyres Light-alloy wheel Tyres Light-alloy wheel Spare wheel: Tyres Light-alloy wheel
1 2 3 4 Make of tyre recommended by Mercedes-Benz: Bridgestone. Make of tyre recommended by Mercedes-Benz: Yokohama. The use of snow chains is not permitted. The spare wheel is of the same type as the standard tyres.
G 5004
1
G 55 AMG
1
265/70 R16 112H M+S 71/2J x 16 H2 ET63 265/60 R18 109H 1 71/2J x 18 H2 ET63
265/70 R16 112H M+S 71/2J x 16 H2 ET63 265/60 R18 109H 1 71/2J x 18 H2 ET63
285/55 R18 113V 2, 3 91/2J x 18 H2 ET50
265/60 R18 110V M+S2 71/2J x 18 H2 ET63
265/60 R18 110V M+S 2 71/2J x 18 H2 ET63 265/60 R18 109H1 71/2J x 18 H2 ET43
398
Technical data
Tyres and wheels
G 270 CDI3 Tyres Light-alloy wheel Tyres Light-alloy wheel Tyres Light-alloy wheel 265/70 R16 112H M+S1 71/2J x 16 H2 ET63 265/60 R18 109H1 71/2J x 18 H2 ET63 265/60 R18 110V M+S2 71/2J x 18 H2 ET63 G 400 CDI3 265/70 R16 112H M+S1 71/2J x 16 H2 ET63 265/60 R18 109H1 71/2J x 18 H2 ET63 265/60 R18 110V M+S2 71/2J x 18 H2 ET63
1 Make of tyre recommended by Mercedes-Benz: Bridgestone. 2 Make of tyre recommended by Mercedes-Benz: Yokohama. 3 The spare wheel is of the same type as the standard tyres.
i
Information concerning the use of tyre sizes not mentioned here can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
399
Technical data
Vehicle dimensions
Long-wheelbase station wagon Vehicle length1 Vehicle width with mirrors folded outwards Vehicle width1 with mirrors folded in Vehicle height1 Wheelbase Ground clearance1 Turning circle
1
Short-wheelbase station wagon 4,210 4,325 mm 2,007 mm 1,774 1,810 mm 1,927 1,977 mm 2,400 mm 205 mm 11.3 m
Cabriolet 4,255 4,370 mm 2,007 mm 1,774 1,810 mm 1,927 1,977 mm 2,400 mm 205 mm 11.3 m
4,655 4,770 mm 2,007 mm 1,774 1,864 mm 1,927 1,977 mm 2,850 mm 205 mm 13.2 13.3 m
1 Dimensions may vary, depending on the vehicle's equipment.
400
Technical data
Vehicle weights Vehicle weights
The unladen weight includes the driver (75 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. Long-wheelbase station wagon G 320 Unladen weight Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight Max. permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load 2,370 kg 3,200 kg 3,100 kg1 1,450 kg 1,900 kg G 500 2,420 kg 3,200 kg 1,450 kg 1,900 kg G 55 AMG 2,550 kg 3,200 kg 1,450 kg 1,900 kg G 270 CDI 2,430 kg 3,200 kg 3,100 kg1 1,450 kg 1,900 kg G 400 CDI 2,540 kg 3,200 kg 1,450 kg 1,900 kg
Trailer towing only: maximum permissible weight 6,700 kg of vehicle/trailer combina 6,600 kg1 tion Maximum payload Maximum roof load
1 Different weights
6,700 kg
6,700 kg
6,700 kg 6,600 kg1 770 kg 670 kg1 200 kg
6,700 kg
830 kg 730 kg1 200 kg
780 kg 200 kg
650 kg
660 kg 200 kg
401
Technical data
Vehicle weights
Short-wheelbase station wagon G 320 Unladen weight Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight Max. permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load Trailer towing only: maximum permissible weight of vehicle/trailer combination 2,220 kg 2,850 kg 1,400 kg 1,700 kg 5,700 kg G 500 2,270 kg 2,850 kg 1,400 kg 1,700 kg 5,700 kg G 270 CDI 2,280 kg 2,850 kg 1,400 kg 1,700 kg 5,700 kg G 400 CDI 2,385 kg 2,850 kg 1,400 kg 1,700 kg 5,700 kg
Trailer towing only: maximum permissible rear axle load1 1,800 kg Maximum payload Maximum roof load 630 kg 150 kg
1,800 kg 580 kg 150 kg
1,800 kg 575 kg 150 kg
1,800 kg 465 kg 150 kg
1 The trailer drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load.
402
Technical data
Vehicle weights
Cabriolet G 320 Unladen weight Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight Max. permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load Trailer towing only: maximum permissible weight of vehicle/trailer combination 2,200 kg 2,850 kg 1,400 kg 1,700 kg 5,700 kg G 500 2,250 kg 2,850 kg 1,400 kg 1,700 kg 5,700 kg G 400 CDI 2,370 kg 2,850 kg 1,400 kg 1,700 kg 5,700 kg
Trailer towing only: maximum permissible rear axle load1 1,800 kg Maximum payload 650 kg
1 The trailer drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load.
1,800 kg 600 kg
1,800 kg 480 kg
403
Technical data
Trailer loads
Long-wheelbase station wagon Trailer, braked Trailer, unbraked

1 Trailer load including trailer drawbar noseweight.
Short-wheelbase station wagon 2,850 kg 750 kg 115 kg
Cabriolet 2,850 kg 750 kg 115 kg
3,500 kg1 750 kg
Maximum trailer drawbar noseweight 140 kg
404
Technical data
Service products and capacities
Service products are:
$ $ $ $ $
petrol diesel lubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil, greases) coolant brake fluid
Risk of accident
Fuels Risk of injury

Fuel is highly flammable. Smoking, fire and naked flames are therefore prohibited when handling fuels. Do not allow fuel to come into contact with skin or clothing. Your health may be damaged if:
$ $
When handling, storing and disposing of service products, please observe the relevant regulations. Failure to do so could endanger people and the environment. Keep service products away from children. Consult a doctor immediately if any service product is swallowed.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use products that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which are listed in the Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manuals since:
$ $
Environmental note
you spill fuel onto your skin you inhale fuel vapours
vehicle parts and service products are matched to each other damage caused by non-approved service products is not covered by the warranty
Dispose of service products in an environmentally-responsible manner.
You may obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
405
Technical data
Tank content Total content: approximately 95 litres The consumption values were determined in accordance with EU Directive 1999/100/EC under the following test conditions:
$
i
The actual consumption values of your vehicle may deviate from the values given depending on:
$ $ $ $
Including reserve approximately fuel 13 litres You will find further information about refuelling and fuels in the "Operation" section (5 page 247). Fuel consumption The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in the following conditions:
$ $ $ $ $
Inner-city driving conditions are simulated by frequent pulling away and stopping Common extra-urban driving conditions are simulated by accelerating from 0 to 120 km/h using all gears Total fuel consumption is calculated using a weighting of approximately 37% for inner-city driving and approximately 63% for extra-urban driving
driving style road and traffic conditions environmental influences the vehicle's operating state
!
Do not use fuel additives. These could lead to increased wear and engine damage. The use of fuel additives could result in a limitation of your warranty entitlement.
At very low temperatures In urban traffic On short trips When towing a trailer In mountainous terrain
406
Technical data
Environmental note
CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scientists currently believe to be chiefly responsible for global warming (greenhouse effect).
Your vehicle's CO2 emissions vary directly according to the fuel consumption and are therefore dependent on:
$ $ $
the efficient use of fuel by the engine the style of driving other non-technical factors, e.g. environmental influences or road conditions
Fuel consumption in accordance with Directive 1999/100/EC (Directive relating to the carbon dioxide emissions and the fuel consumption of motor vehicles) G 320 Urban Extra-urban Overall CO2 emissions 20.0 l/100 km 12.8 l/100 km 15.5 l/100 km 370.0 g/km G 500 20.9 l/100 km 12.8 l/100 km 15.8 l/100 km 378.0 g/km G 55 AMG G 270 CDI 12.8 l/100 km 9.6 l/100 km 10.9 l/100 km 289.0 g/km G 400 CDI 16.1 l/100 km 11.0 l/100 km 12.8 l/100 km 343.0 g/km
407
Technical data
Engine oil The values indicate the total contents of the various engines. Engine with oil filter Replacement amount G 320 8.5 litres G 500 8.0 litres G 55 AMG 8.5 litres G 270 CDI 7.0 litres G 400 CDI 9.0 litres
You may use any passenger vehicle engine oil which has been approved for MercedesBenz vehicles. A list of engine oils which has been tested and approved in accordance with Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, Sheets 229.1 and 229.3, is available from any MercedesBenz Service Centre. Some oil containers may also be marked "Approved in accordance with MB Sheet 229.1 or 229.3", for example.
!
Do not use fuel additives. These could lead to increased wear and engine damage. The use of fuel additives could result in a limitation of your warranty entitlement. Engine oil viscosity Select the SAE class (viscosity) of the engine oil according to the time of year. The following table shows you which SAE class you should use at which average ambient temperatures.
The temperatures shown are guidelines only, and small deviations either way are permitted.
P.18.00-2056-31(Aus Ba. 163)
408
Technical data
Coolant The following values indicate the various coolant system total contents. G 320 Coolant Coolant in vehicles with heater booster* 11.3 litres 11.8 litres G 500 12.0 litres 12.5 litres G 55 AMG 12.7 litres 13.2 litres G 270 CDI 12.8 litres 13.3 litres G 400 CDI 14.7 litres 15.3 litres
Corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze for anti freeze protection down to: G 320 37 C (50%) 45 C (55%) Vehicles with heater booster* 37 C (50%) 45 C (55%) 5.9 litres 6.5 litres 6.3 litres 6.9 litres 6.6 litres 7.3 litres 6.7 litres 7.3 litres 7.6 litres 8.4 litres 5.7 litres 6.2 litres G 500 6.0 litres 6.6 litres G 55 AMG 6.4 litres 7.0 litres G 270 CDI 6.4 litres 7.0 litres G 400 CDI 7.4 litres 8.1 litres
409
Technical data
Coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze and corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks in the cooling system:
$ $ $
If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in the correct concentration, the boiling point of the coolant will be around 130 C. The antifreeze and corrosion inhibitor concentration in the cooling system should be around 50%. This will protect the cooling system against freezing down to around 37 C. The antifreeze and corrosion inhibitor concentration in the cooling system should not exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to 45 C), since the heat is then not removed so effectively.
If the vehicle is losing coolant:

Anti-corrosion protection Antifreeze protection Raising the boiling point
Top it up with equal parts of water and an antifreeze and corrosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recommends antifreeze and corrosion inhibitor that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
!
Always use a suitable coolant even in countries with high temperatures. If you do not do so, the cooling system will not be sufficiently protected from corrosion and the boiling point will be too low.
!
Have the coolant renewed every 15 years or after 250,000 km have been covered.
410
Technical data
Brake fluid Over a period of time, the brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air; this reduces its boiling point. Risk of accident Windscreen washer system The washer fluid reservoir holds around 7.5 litres. The headlamp cleaning system and the windscreen washer system have a common supply from the washer fluid reservoir.

Risk of fire
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when windscreen washer concentrate is being handled.
If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapour pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard (e.g. when driving downhill). This would impair the braking efficiency. Have the brake fluid renewed annually.
Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and windscreen washer concentrate. Vary the mixture ratio according to the outside temperature. The windscreen wipers will not then leave any streaks. The headlamp cleaning system and the windscreen washer system do not freeze.
i
There is usually a notice in the engine compartment to remind you when the next brake fluid change is due.
411
Technical data
Frequencies for garage door openers*
Country
Radio type approval number GZ104569-ZB/98 RTT/D/X 2064 MCW129/95 12/ 2000 98.3142-266 FI98080106 97619 RD 97619 RD D800038K JCI 05JUL2000RTTE 97619 RD BB-5793-1/2000
Frequency range 27 MHz 26.975 27.283 26.957 27.283 26.957 27.283 26.975 27.28 26.957 27.283 27 26.957 27.283 26.957 27.283 26.957 27.283 27 26.957 27.283 27 30.875 30.875 30.875 30 MHz, 418 MHz 40 MHz 40.66 40.7 40.66 40.7 40.66 40.7 40.66 40.7 40.66 40.7 40 40.66 40.7 40.66 40.7 40.66 40.7 40.66 40.7 40 40.66 40.7 40 433 MHz 433.87 434.79 433.05 434.79 433 433.05 434.79 433.05 434.79 433.05 434.79 433 433.05 434.79 433.05 434.79 433.05 434.79 433.05 434.79 433 433.05 434.79 433
Austria Belgium Chile Cyprus
Czech Republic CTU 2000 3 R1194 Denmark Finland France French Guyana Germany Gibraltar Greece Guadeloupe Hungary
RTTE 20754/0087847 26.957 27.283
412
Technical data
Country
Radio type approval number IS-3418-00 TRA 24/5/109/5 DGPGF/4/341032/ TB 0002573 L2433/10510-01J (BR 211, 215, 220, 230, 240) L2433/10510-03J (BR 163, 203, 209, 463) 27
Frequency range 27 MHz 30 MHz, 418 MHz 40 40.66 40.7 40.66 40.7 40.66 40.7 40 MHz 433 MHz 433.92 433.05 434.79 433.05 434.79 433.05 434.79
Iceland Ireland (Republic) Italy Luxembourg
26.957 27.283 26.957 27.283 26.957 27.283
26.957 27.283
40.66 40.7
433.05 434.79
Malta Martinique Norway Poland Portugal
WT/122/98 97619 RD NO20000026 CLBT/C/66/2002 JCI 03JUL2000 RTTE
27 26.957 27.283 26.957 27.283 26.975 27.280 27
30.875
40 40.66 40.7 40.66 40.7 40.66 40.7 40
433 433.05 434.79 433.05 434.79 433.87 433.97 433
413
Technical data
Country
Radio type approval number 97619 RD E D.G.Tel.01 00 0398 Ue990195 BAKOM 98.0746.K.P R 267 2001 N 27
Frequency range 27 MHz 26.957 27.283 27.095 26.975 27.280 26.975 27.283 30 MHz, 418 MHz 30.875 417.9 418.1 40 MHz 40.66 40.7 40 40.68 40.66 40.7 40.66 40.7 40.66 40.7 40.66 40.7 433 MHz 433.05 434.79 433 433.92 433.87 434.97 433.05 434.79 433.05 434.75 433.05 434.79 433.05 434.79
Reunion Spain Sweden Switzerland The Slovak Republic The United Kingdom Turkey
The Netherlands NL99030970
RTTE 20754/0087847 26.957 27.283 0425/TGM-TR/JOCO- 26.957 27.283 EURO
414
Technical terms
A-pillar The front pillar connecting the roof and the body (->B-pillar, ->C-pillar) ABS (Anti-lock braking system) Prevents the wheels from locking when you brake, allowing you to continue steering. ASR (Acceleration skid control) Components of ->ESP; ASR controls the drive torque at the ->wheels according to the situation, thus improving ->traction when driving on slippery surfaces. ASSYST (Active Service System) Service indicator of the ->operating system, which displays when the next service is due.
Asymmetrical dipped-beam headlamps Position of the dipped-beam headlamps which allows the outer edge of the carriageway to be lit up. Audio 10, Audio 10 CD* and Audio 30 Export* System Term for your vehicle's car radio including the built-in loudspeakers. Automatic transmission Engine speed-torque converter which converts the high engine speed (at low torque) to lower drive wheel speeds (at high torque). B-pillar The centre pillar connecting the roof and the body (->A-pillar, ->C-pillar)
Ball coupling* Attachment on the vehicle. Part of the trailer coupling to which the trailer is coupled. BAS (Brake Assist) System for shortening the stopping distance in hazardous situations, activated by the driver depressing the brake pedal rapidly. Belt drive Drive connection from the engine to the engine assemblies such as the alternator or the air-conditioning compressor. C-pillar The rear pillar connecting the roof and the body (->A-pillar, ->C-pillar)
415
Technical terms
CAC (Customer Assistance Center) DaimlerChrysler Customer Service Center offering advice on all matters concerning your vehicle and support in the event of a breakdown. CAN system (Controller Area Network) Controls vehicle functions such as the central locking system or windscreen wipers depending on the vehicle or environmental conditions and delivers information to the ->operating system. This system works because the electronic systems in the vehicle are all interconnected. CDI (Common Rail Direct Injection) Diesel injection technology in which all cylinders have a common feed line. Fine injection nozzles allow very precise metering, which lowers diesel consumption.
Chassis number Number determined by the manufacturer and affixed to the body, by which each vehicle can be clearly identified. Child seat recognition Special child seats are available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat. If you have fitted a special child seat of this kind to the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger airbag is automatically deactivated (the AIRBAG OFF warning lamp on the centre console lights up). Cockpit All the instruments, switches, buttons and warning and indicator lamps in the passenger compartment of your vehicle necessary for monitoring and controlling the vehicle.
COMAND* (Cockpit Management and Data System) Information and operating centre for various functions within your vehicle, such as the radio, CD player and other optional equipment, e.g. a CD changer, telephone, etc. Control unit The part of the engine electronics which controls the engine function. Cruise control System which enables a vehicle speed set by the driver to be maintained automatically. Differential lock Provides better ->traction in poor road conditions. Since the ->differential unit enables ->wheels to spin separately, the differential lock can prevent this and lock both driven ->wheels together via the ->differential unit.
416
Technical terms
Differential unit ->Transfer case in one axle. Power from the engine is transferred to the ->wheels inside the differential unit. The differential unit ensures that ->wheels rotate at different speeds when cornering, since the ->wheels on the inside have a smaller distance to cover than the ones on the outside, thereby requiring fewer rotations. Drive train Collective term for all vehicle components which belong to the drive, such as:
$ $ $ $ $ $ $ $
DynAPS* (dynamic route guidance) Adapts the route guidance calculated by the navigation system to the prevailing traffic situation. Traffic jam information is received by the system in SMS form. e mark Symbol to indicate certification in accordance with the relevant EU Directives. ELCODE (Electronic Code System) System that electronically checks access and authorisation to drive and is part of the anti-theft protection system for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) The electrical and electronic components of the vehicle are protected from interference fields, such as transmitters, radar systems, overhead power lines or radiophones. EN 228 European standard for unleaded petrol. Engine control system Controls the engine, e.g. the engine speed. Engine number Number determined by the manufacturer and marked on the cylinder crankcase, by which each engine can be clearly identified.
the engine ->the automatic transmission ->the differential locks ->the transfer case the propeller shafts the differential hub reduction the drive shafts ->the wheels
417
Technical terms
Engine oil viscosity Measurement for the inner friction (viscosity) of the oil at different temperatures. The viscosity is better the higher the temperature the oil can withstand without becoming too thin, or the lower the temperature it can withstand without becoming too thick. ESP (Electronic Stability Program) Improves directional stability and ->traction when cornering. FCD (Floating Car Data) One of DaimlerChrysler's ->telematics services for recalling vehicle data for traffic guidance and traffic information systems.
GPS (Global Positioning System) Satellite signals received by suitable receivers to supply information on the geographical location of the vehicle. These signals are then compared with a digital map (e.g. on CD ROM) and used to determine the location of the vehicle and for navigation purposes. GSM (Global System for Mobile Communications) The GS standard establishes the guidelines for constructing a cellular digital mobile system. Thanks to this uniform standard, you can also use your mobile abroad. Within GSM, there are approximately 300 network operators in 120 countries. The transmission method is digital.
Instrument cluster Displays and indicator lamps in the driver's field of vision, e.g. the rev counter, the speedometer and the fuel gauge. Interior motion sensor* (IRS) Part of the vehicle's anti-theft systems which sets off an alarm if the side windows are smashed and someone attempts to put a hand inside while the vehicle is closed and locked. Kickdown The ->automatic transmission is shifted down to the lowest possible gear when the accelerator pedal is depressed beyond the pressure point. This accelerates the vehicle more rapidly than without downshifting.
418
Technical terms
Knock resistance Resistance of petrol to uncontrolled self-ignition of the gas-air mixture in the cylinder head (knocking). The octane number is a measure of knock resistance. The higher the octane number, the higher the knock resistance. LED (Light-Emitting Diode) Semiconductor element which directly converts electricity into light. LIM indicator lamp (Limiter) Indicator lamp in the cruise control lever which indicates whether variable ->Speedtronic is activated. Line of fall The direct line along which an object moves downhill when no forces are working on it apart from the force of gravity.
Linguatronic* Operates the carphone, mobile phone or audio systems, e.g. the radio or CD player, by voice control. Locking knob Knob on the door which shows whether the door is locked or unlocked. Memory function Memory for three individual seat, steering wheel and mirror positions per key. Menu The ->operating system displays are arranged in menus. Several commands are thematically combined in the menus. For example, the Audio menu contains the Select station or Operate CD player. You can change the settings for your vehicle directly using these commands.
MON Indicates the petrol octane number determined by standard methods. It measures petrol resistance against undesirable self-ignition (knock resistance). Multi-function display Display in the ->instrument cluster showing ->operating system information. Multi-function steering wheel Steering wheel with buttons which control the ->operating system. On-board voltage Vehicle's voltage, influenced by outgoing lines, consumers and return lines. The battery can buffer, i.e. accept and produce, extremely high currents without causing a significant change to the voltage.
419
Technical terms
Operating system You can use the operating system to look up information on your vehicle and make adjustments. For these purposes, information is displayed in the ->multi-function display, and the buttons on the ->multi-function steering wheel control the operating system display and settings. Overrevving range Speeds in the red area of the rev counter at which the engine can only operate for a short period. Overrun mode Passive acceleration of the vehicle, e.g. when driving down a mountain.
Parking brake Secures the vehicle against rolling away when parking. Partial load operation Operating state of the engine in which only part of the maximum power or maximum torque is used, e.g. in ->overrun mode. RDS (Radio-Data-System) Signals transmitted by radio broadcasters giving traffic reports which are then processed by, e.g. ->COMAND*, for dynamic route guidance.
Rearward-facing child seat Special restraint system for children up to 9 months old or weighing up 10 kg. The rearward-facing child seat is mounted on the front-passenger seat facing away from the direction of travel. The front-passenger seat sensor system prevents the front-passenger airbag from being released when a rearward-facing seat with ->automatic child seat recognition is fitted. Restraint systems Seat belts, belt tensioners, airbags and child restraint systems. As independent systems, their protective functions complement one another.
420
Technical terms
Roadside assistance* Transmits vehicle data and the current position of your vehicle to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center using the telephone network and ->TeleAid*. RON Indicates the petrol octane number determined by standard methods. It measures petrol resistance against undesirable self-ignition (knock resistance). Selector lever lock Lock which prevents the ->automatic transmission selector lever from accidentally shifting from position P to another position while the vehicle is parked. Shift range Number of gears available to the ->automatic transmission. The shift range can be limited.
SMS (Short Message Service) Mobile network service enabling up-todate traffic reports to be received from >DynAPS. Speed index Part of the tyre designation; indicates the speed range for which a tyre is suitable. Speedtronic Using Speedtronic the driver can determine a variable limit speed. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Additional ->restraint systems such as belt tensioners and belt force limiters. Steering capability The steering capability describes the extent to which the driver's steering movements translate into actual changes in the vehicle's direction.
Symmetrical dipped-beam headlamps Position of the dipped-beam headlamps which allows both edges of the carriageway to be lit up equally. TeleAid* (Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand) ->DaimlerChrysler telematics system which includes the emergency call* service, ->roadside assistance* and MB Info*. Telematics* Joint term for telecommunications and information technology. Tightening torque Force with which bolts, e.g. wheel bolts, must be tightened (->torque). TIREFIT kit* Accessory for temporarily repairing tyres. The TIREFIT kit consists of a filler bottle with sealant, a filler hose, a valve core extractor with valve core and an electric pump.
421
Technical terms
Torque Force which is exerted about a central axis where there is rotational movement, e.g. when tightening a wheel bolt. In engines, the torque is the force transferred to the transmission. The maximum torque is achieved at a given engine speed. The higher the maximum torque, the greater the force transferred from the vehicle to the wheels. Torque converter In vehicles with automatic transmission, this performs the function that the clutch performs in a manual transmission. Traction Force transferred from the vehicle to the road via the wheels and a term used to describe grip. Traction mode Active acceleration of the vehicle by adding more throttle.
Transfer case Distributes drive power to the rear and front axles. In the LOW off-road position, the drive train speed is reduced by half. This increases the drive power accordingly. Ultrasound reversing aid* System which makes reversing easier by giving the driver visual and audible signals. Wheel ->Wheel rim and tyre, commonly known as wheel. Wheel rim Part of the ->wheel on which the tyre is fitted.
422
Index
A ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 415 Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . 19, 309, 310 Messages in the multi-function display . . . . . . 316, 317 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 AC OFF button (Thermatic) . . . . . . 191 Accepting Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Accident Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Active Service System . . . . . . . . . . 283 Additional turn signals (exterior mirrors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Adjusting Belt height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 30 Head restraints Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 30 Multi-contour seat* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Adjusting the front seat Switch on the door control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Adjusting the headlamp range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 119 Adjusting the instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Alarm Audible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Disabling the alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Ambient lighting (locator lighting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Angle Head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Anti-dazzle mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Antifreeze protection . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Anti-lock braking system see ABS Anti-theft alarm system Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . 76 Disabling the alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Anti-theft systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 A-pillar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 226 ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 ASSYST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283, 415 Asymmetrical dipped-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Audible alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Audio Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Audio systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Audio 30* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Automatic Locking when driving . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Automatic air conditioning see Thermatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Automatic child seat recognition . . 66 Automatic headlamp feature . . . . . 116
423
Index
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . 36, 164, 415 Emergency operating mode . . . . . . 296 Gear indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Gearshift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . . . 166 Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Problems with gear shifts . . . . . . . . 296 Releasing the parking lock manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Selector lever positions . . . . . . 36, 166 Shift ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Automatic transmission gear indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Automatically Switching off the telephone* . . . . . 234 Auxiliary heating* Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . 194, 195 Changing the batteries . . . . . . . . 351 Setting the switch-on time . . . . . . . 151 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 195 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Auxiliary heating/ventilation* . . . 193
B Ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Ball coupling-trailer tow hitch* . . . 113 BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 72, 415 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Changing the battery in the auxiliary heating remote control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Key Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Message in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Belt drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Belt height Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Catch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Messages in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Bonnet catch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Boot Message in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 B-pillar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Brake Assist see BAS Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Message in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Brake lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Message in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Braking Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Message in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . 19, 311, 312 Bulbs Changing the front bulbs . . . . . . . . 358 Changing the rear bulbs . . . . . . . . . 363 Messages in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Buttons on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 130
424
Index
C Cabriolet Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Draught stop* Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Removing the tonneau cover* . . . . 207 Soft top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Opening/closing manually . . . . . 354 Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 CAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Call Accepting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Hanging up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Calling up Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Calling up the range (trip computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 CAN system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Cancelling Easy-entry adjustment procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 98, 155 Cancelling the adjustment procedure (easy-entry feature) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 98, 155 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 High-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . 287 Trailer tow hitch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 CD changer* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 CDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Activating/deactivating automatically (operating system) . . 150 Central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Centre armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Centre console Lower section, Overview . . . . . . . . . 22 Upper section, Overview . . . . . . . . . 21 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Changing gear Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . 36 Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Checking Coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . . 254 Engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Using the dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Using the operating system . . . . 254 Checklist for off-road driving . . . . . 271 Child restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . 61 Child seat Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Rearward-facing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 416 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Securing system in the rear passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . 69 Securing system, ISOFIX* . . . . . . . . 67 Weight category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Child-proof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 61
425
Index
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Cabriolet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Trailer tow hitch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Ultrasound reversing aid* sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Cleaning system Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Clearing Malfunction memory . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Setting the hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Setting the minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Cabriolet soft top manually . . . . . . 354 Garage door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Rear door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 198
Sliding/tilting sunroof* . . . . . . . . . 201 Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Tailgate (Cabriolet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Vehicle in an emergency . . . . . . . . 348 Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 COMAND* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 416 Combination switch . . . . . . . . . . 17, 40 Headlamp flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Main-beam headlamps . . . . . . . 17, 121 Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 41 Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Consumption statistics After start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Control panel Thermatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390, 416 Convenience closing feature . . . . . . 85 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258, 409 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258, 409 Expansion tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Level Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Messages in the multi-function display . . . . 325, 326 Temperature Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Increased . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Cover Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 111 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . 208, 416 Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Fine adjustment in increments of 1 km/h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Resuming a stored speed . . . . . . . . 210 Setting a lower speed . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Cruise control lever Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Cruise control, Speedtronic lever . . 17 Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222, 224 Customer Assistance Center . . . . . 416
426
Index
D Defrosting the front windows . . . . 188 Delayed headlamp switch-off . . . . 118 Delayed switch-off Exterior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . 118, 147 Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249, 405 Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Mixing ratio with kerosene . . . . . . . 250 Reserve fuel warning lamp . . . . . . . 313 Tank content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Diesel engine Bleeding the fuel system . . . . . . . . 251 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Differential locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Differential unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Digital clock see Clock Digital speedometer . . . . . . . . . 19, 134 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Dipped-beam headlamps . . . . . 40, 357 Changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Message in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Symmetrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Direction of rotation (tyres) . . . . . . 262 Display Digital speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 In the instrument cluster . . 19, 20, 130 Message in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Ultrasound reversing aid* . . . . . . . 220 Distance recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Door Message in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Opening from the inside . . . . . . . . . . 85 Door control panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Draught stop* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Drive train . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 In winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Driving abroad Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Driving safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Driving systems Ultrasound reversing aid* . . . . . . . 218 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Driving in wet conditions . . . . . . . . 267 Off-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Overrun cut-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 DynAPS* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 417 E e mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Easy-entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Easy-entry feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Activating/deactivating in the Convenience submenu . . . . . . . 154 Cancelling the adjustment procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 155 Easy-entry/exit feature see Easy-entry feature Easy-exit/entry feature see Easy-entry feature ELCODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
427
Index
Electrical system Fuse allocation (chart) . . . . . . . . . . 383 Fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383, 384 Fuse extractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Spare fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Electronic Stability Program see ESP Electronic traction support see 4-ETS EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Emergency Unlocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Emergency call system* . . . . . . . . 237 Initiating an emergency call . . . . . . 239 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Emergency key element . . . . . . . . . 348 Lost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Emergency operating mode Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . 296 EN 228 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Engine air cleaner Messages in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Engine control system . . . . . . . . . . 417
Engine diagnostic Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Engine diagnostics Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Filler neck G 270 CDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 G 320, G 500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 G 400 CDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408, 418 Engine oil level Checking using the dipstick . . . . . . 256 Checking using the operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Messages in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Engine Checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392, 417 Rated output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Starting after an accident . . . . . . . . 295 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 EPC Message in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 73, 417, 418 Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 307 4-ETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 72 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Expansion tank Coolant . . . . . . . 258 Exterior lighting Changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Delayed switch-off . . . . . . . . 118, 147 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 See also Lights Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Additional turn signals . . . . . . . . . . 357 Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 30 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Parking position . . . . . . . . . . 156, 178 Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Eyelets for securing a load . . . . . . . 105
428
Index
F Fast mode Phone book* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 FCD (telematics service*) . . . 236, 418 Fine adjustment Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Variable Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Fire extinguisher* Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 First-aid kit Cabriolet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Long-wheelbase station wagon . . . 341 Short-wheelbase station wagon . . . 342 5-speed automatic transmission . . 36 Floormats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Folding down the front seat backrests (easy-entry function) . . . 96 4-ETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 72 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Frequencies Garage door opener* . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Telephone* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Front bulbs Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Front foglamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Message in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Front reading lamps Switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Front-passenger airbag Deactivated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Bleeding the system (diesel engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 In accordance with Directive 1999/100/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Consumption statistics . . . . . . . . . 157 Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Tank content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Fuel filler flap Emergency release . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Fuel tank Run dry (vehicles with diesel engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Function Resetting (operating system) . . . . . 140 Fuse extractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Fuses (electric) . . . . . . . . . . . . 383, 384 G Garage door Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Garage door opener* . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Clearing the memory . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Programming the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Remote control (rear-view mirror) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Transmitter buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Gauge Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Genuine parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
429
Index
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . 17, 221 Good visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 GSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 H Hand brake (parking brake) . . . . . . . 36 Hands-free system* Microphone* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Hazard warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . 121 Head restraints Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Installing and removing . . . . . . . . . . 95 Resetting the front seat head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Headlamp flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Headlamps Adjusting the headlamp range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 119 Changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 259 Misted up on the inside . . . . . . . . . 293
Headlamps delayed switch-off see Exterior lighting delayed switch-off Heater Submenu* (operating system) . . . . 150 Heater booster system* . . . . . . . . . 196 Selecting the settings . . . . . . . . . . 153 Heating Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Seat* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Steering wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 See also Auxiliary heating*, Heater booster* and Thermatic Height Head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Height adjustment Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 High-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . 287 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Hours Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
I Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 35 Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Indicator lamp ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 309, 310 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311, 312 Cruise control with Speedtronic . . . . 19 Engine diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Engine diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Garage door opener* . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Main-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Preglow on vehicles with diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Instrument cluster . . . . . 17, 126, 418 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 20, 130 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Selecting the language . . . . . . . . . . 144 Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Controlling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Delayed switch-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
430
Index
Interior motion sensor* . . . . . . 78, 418 Intermittent wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 IRS* see Interior motion sensor* ISOFIX* child seat securing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 J Jack Cabriolet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Long-wheelbase station wagon . . . Short-wheelbase station wagon . . . Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
344 341 343 377
K Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Lost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Message in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Position in the ignition lock . . . . . . . 35 Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 418 Kilometres display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Knock resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
L Language Multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Lashing eyelets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Licence plate illumination . . . . . . . 357 Changing the bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Message in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Light sensor Message in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 40, 115 Light-alloy wheel Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Additional turn signals . . . . . . . . . . 357 Brake lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Combination switch . . . . . . . . . 40, 121 Delayed headlamp switch-off . . . . . 118 Dipped-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 357, 360 Exterior Changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Front foglamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 357, 361 Hazard warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . 121 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Licence plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Licence plate illumination . . . . . . . 357 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 115 Locator lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Luggage compartment lighting . . . 124 Main-beam headlamps . . . . . . . 40, 121, 357, 360 Parking lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 357, 361 Rear foglamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357, 364 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Rear lamp units . . . . . . . . . . . 124, 363 Rear reading lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Remote-operated illuminated entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Reversing lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . 357, 364 Side lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357, 361 Switching on (exterior) . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Switching on the front foglamps . . 117 Third brake lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357, 362
431
Index
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Combination switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Exterior lighting, delayed switch-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Switching on/off automatically . . . 116 See also Lighting LIM indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Line of fall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Linguatronic* Microphone* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 See separate Operating Instructions Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Safety net* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Ski holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Stowage boxes* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Loads Anchoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Safety net* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Locator lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 82 Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Centrally from the inside . . . . . . . . . 91 Fuel filler flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Locking differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Locking knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Luggage Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Roof rack* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Luggage compartment Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Loading guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Side-facing rear bench seat . . . . . . 100 Luggage compartment blind . . . . . 111 Luggage compartment cover . . . . . 111 Luggage compartment light Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Luggage net In the front-passenger footwell . . . 223
M Main fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Main-beam headlamps . . . 17, 40, 357 Changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Message in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Making a telephone call* . . . . . . . . 231 Making telephone calls* . . . . . 20, 130 Malfunction memory . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Malfunction messages . . . . . . . . . . 137 Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Maximum Payload Cabriolet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Long-wheelbase station wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Short-wheelbase station wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
432
Index
Roof load Long-wheelbase station wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Short-wheelbase station wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Maximum speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 MB Info* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Mechanical key element . . . . . . . . 348 Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 419 Switch on the door control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Menu Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 In the operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130, 132, 419 Malfunction memory . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Navigation* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Telephone* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Microphone* Hands-free system* . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Minimum distance Ultrasound reversing aid* . . . . . . . 219 Minutes Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 30 Switch on the door control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Exterior, automatic anti-dazzle . . . . 176 Heated exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . 177 Rear-view, automatic anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Misfiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Mobile phone* Removing from the telephone bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Mobile telephone* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 MON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Multi-contour seat* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Multi-function display . . . . 20, 130, 419 Messages ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316, 317 Battery (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Brake lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . 325, 326 Dipped-beam headlamps . . . . . . 327 Display faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Engine air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 EPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Front foglamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Licence plate lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Light sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Main-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . 331 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Parking lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Rear foglamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Reserve fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
433
Index
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 TeleAid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Telephone* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Trailer turn signal lamp . . . . . . . . 327 Transfer case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Selecting the language . . . . . . . . . . 144 Multi-function steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 130, 419 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 N Navigation system* Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 O Occupant safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Octane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Off-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Mountainous terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Off-road driving on mountainous terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Oil Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Level in the automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 See also Engine oil On-board voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . . . 166 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Cabriolet soft top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Door from the inside . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Fuel filler flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Sliding/tilting sunroof* . . . . . . . . . 201 Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Tailgate (Cabriolet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Vehicle in an emergency . . . . . . . . 348
Operating system . . . . . . . . . 129, 420 Auxiliary heating* switch-on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Convenience submenu . . . . . . . . . . 154 Coolant temperature Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Heater submenu* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Instrument cluster submenu . . . . . 142 Malfunction memory menu . . . . . . 137 Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130, 132 Multi-function steering wheel . . . . . 130 Navigation* menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Selecting the display for the speedometer, total distance recorder and trip computer . . . . . . 144 Selecting the heater booster* settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Selecting the language . . . . . . . . . . 144 Selecting the standard display . . . . 145 Selecting the temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Selecting the time display . . . . . . . 143
434
Index
Setting constant headlamp mode Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Setting key dependence . . . . . . . . 156 Setting the automatic door lock . . 150 Setting the exterior lighting delayed switch-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Setting the interior lighting delayed switch-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Setting the station selection . . . . . 149 Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Switching the locator lighting on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Telephone* menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Trip computer menu . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Vehicle submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 127 Overhead control panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Overrevving range . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Overrun cut-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Overrun mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
P Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Parking aid see Ultrasound reversing aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Parking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 420 Message in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Parking lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Message in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Parking lock Releasing manually . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Parking position Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Parking position for the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Partial load operation . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Payload Cabriolet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Long-wheelbase station wagon . . . 401 Short-wheelbase station wagon . . . 402
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 405 Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Leaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Reserve fuel warning lamp . . . . . . . 313 Tank content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Phone book* Fast mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Power windows Opening/closing side windows . . . 198 Practical advice Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Preglow indicator lamp (vehicles with diesel engine) . . . . . . 19 Prepaid cards* Short messages (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . 236 Pressure see Tyre pressures . . . 263 Pulling away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
435
Index
R Radio type approval number . . . . . 412 Radio* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Range of the sensors (ultrasound reversing aid*) . . . . . . 219 RDS (Radio Data System) . . . . . . . . 420 Rear air vents (air conditioning) . . 184 Rear bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Rear bulbs Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Rear door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Rear foglamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Changing the bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Message in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Rear lamp units Changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Rear seats (rear bench seat) . . . . . . 99 Rear window heating . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . 43, 179 Rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Remote control (garage door opener*) . . . . . . . . . . 240 Rearward-facing child seat . . . 65, 420 Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Remote control Auxiliary heating* . . . . . . . . . 194, 195 Changing the batteries . . . . . . . . 351 In the rear-view mirror* . . . . . . . . . 240 Programming garage door openers* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 See also Key Remote-operated illuminated entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Reserve fuel Message in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 313 Reserve fuel warning lamp (fuel gauge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Reserve fuel warning lamp (tank content) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Resetting All functions (operating system) . . . 138 All the functions in a submenu . . . . 140 Consumption statistics . . . . . . . . . . 158 ESP, ABS and BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Front seat head restraints . . . . . . . . 96 Trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Residual heat Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . 46, 420 for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Message in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 127 Reversing aid* (ultrasound) . . . . . . 218 Reversing lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Changing the bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Road speed display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Roadside assistance* . . . . . . 238, 421 RON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
436
Index
Roof load Long-wheelbase station wagon . . . 401 Short-wheelbase station wagon . . . 402 Roof rack* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Ruffled pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Rules for off-road driving . . . . . . . . 270 Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Run-on time Telephone* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231, 234 S Safety Anti-theft systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Driving safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Safety net* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Seat belts Child seat lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Fastening seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Message in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 313
Seat heating* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 93 Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Switch on the door control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Folding down the front seat backrests (easy-entry function) . . . . 96 Heating* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Rear bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Ruffled pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Side-facing rear bench seat* in the luggage compartment . . . . . 100 Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Selecting the standard display (operating system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Selector lever position Automatic transmission . . . . . . 19, 166
Sensors (ultrasound reversing aid*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Calling up the due date . . . . . . . . . Display messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . Missing the due date . . . . . . . . . . . Resetting the indicator . . . . . . . . . . Service life (tyres) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windscreen washer fluid . . . . . . . . Setting Constant headlamp mode . . . . . . . Convenience functions . . . . . . . . . . Language Multi-function display . . . . . . . . . Parking position for the exterior mirrors (operating system) Set the parking position for the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . .
218 219 285 284 284 285 262 405 411 409 408 411 145 154 144
156
437
Index
Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature Thermatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature display in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . Time display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the automatic door lock (operating system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the convenience functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the station selection . . . . . Setting the unit Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings Resetting all (operating system) . . Resetting for a submenu . . . . . . . . Shift ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . Transfer case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
102 187 143 143 138 150 154 149 143 138 140 421 167 170
Side lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Side windows Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Switch on the door control panel . . . 24 Side-facing rear bench seat* in the luggage compartment . . . . . 100 Ski holder* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Sliding/tilting sunroof* Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Sliding/tilting sunroof* . . . . . . . . . 200 SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 421 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Soft top (Cabriolet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Soft top switches Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Spare fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Spare wheel Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Speed In individual gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Setting Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Variable Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . 215 Storing Variable Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . 214 Tyre index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Speed index (tyres) . . . . . . . . 397, 421 Speed limit Variable Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Selecting the display . . . . . . . . . . . 144
438
Index
Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Cruise control lever . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Deactivating (variable) . . . . . . . . . . 217 Fine adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Message in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Set speed display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Setting a speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Storing a speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Variable speed limit . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 312 Starter battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 37 Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Engine after an accident . . . . . . . . 295 Starting the petrol engine . . . . . . . . 38 Steam cleaners see High-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . 287
Steering Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Steering lock (ignition lock) . . . . 17, 35 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Switch on the door control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 130 Easy-entry feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Heating* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Storing Key-dependent settings . . . . . . . . . 156 Parking position for the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Storing key-dependent settings . . 156 Stowage boxes* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Stowage compartments . . . . . . . . . 221 Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 In the armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Ruffled pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Heater* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Overview of settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Resetting a function . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Summer opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off (air conditioning) . . . . . . . . 189 Switching off Telephone* automatically . . . . . . . 234 Switch-on time Setting the auxiliary heating* . . . . 151 Symmetrical dipped-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279, 421
439
Index
T Tail lamps Message in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Tailgate (Cabriolet) Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Tank content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Technical data Engine power output . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Frequencies (garage door openers*) . . . . . . . . . 412 Light-alloy wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Trailer loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Vehicle weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 TeleAid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 421 Emergency call system . . . . . . . . . 237 Initiating an emergency call manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 MB Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Messages in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Telematics* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 DynAPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Telephone bracket* . . . . . . . 229, 233 Making a call with . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Telephone* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Accepting a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Automatic switch-off . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Automatic switch-off (run-on time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Hands-free system* Microphone* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Hanging up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Memory preset number when redialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Messages in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Network provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Phone book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Reception quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Redialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Temperature Display (outside) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Selecting the display in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Setting (Thermatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 The first 1,500 km . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Thermatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Adjusting air distribution manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Adjusting the airflow manually . . . . 188 Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 184 Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Rear air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Residual heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Setting the temperature . . . . . . . . . 187 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Switching economy mode on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Third brake lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
440
Index
Time Selecting the display . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Setting the hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Setting the minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 TIREFIT kit* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Tonneau cover* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Topping up Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Torque converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Total distance recorder . . . . . . . . . . 19 Selecting the display . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Tow-away protection* . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Stuck vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Towing eye Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Towing speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Towing out a vehicle that is stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Towing speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Traction mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Traction system, electronic see 4-ETS Trailer loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Trailer tow hitch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Notes on care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . 169 Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Trailer turn signal lamp Messages in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Transfer case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Message in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Selector position display . . . . . . . . . 19 Shift ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Transfer case selector position display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Transmission Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Transmission oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Transmitter buttons, garage door opener* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Calling up the range . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Consumption statistics after start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Consumption statistics since the last reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Selecting the display . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Lights in the switches and buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
441
Index
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Combination switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 In the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . 357 Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Message in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Tyre wear pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261, 397, 422 Direction of rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Flat tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Grip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Retreaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Speed index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397, 421 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Tread depth of winter tyres . . . . . . 277 Wear pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
U Ultrasound reversing aid* . . 218, 422 Cleaning the sensors . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Minimum distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Sensors In the rear bumper . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Warning display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Centrally from the inside . . . . . . . . . 91 Fuel filler flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 V Variable Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Fine adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Setting a stored speed . . . . . . . . . . 215 Vegetable oil methyl ester* . . . . . . 251
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Cabriolet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Leaving parked up . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Locking in an emergency . . . . . . . . 348 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Setting individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Unlocking in an emergency . . . . . . 348 Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Washing with a high-pressure cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Vehicle care Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Vehicle identification plate . . . . . . 392
442
Index
Vehicle tool kit Cabriolet specifications . . . . . . . . . Long-wheelbase station wagon specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Short-wheelbase station wagon specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VME fuels* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice output see separate Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . .
344 341 342 408 251 419
W Warning lamp ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 311, 312 ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 307 Reserve fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 313 Restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 313
Warning triangle Cabriolet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Long-wheelbase station wagon . . . 340 Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Short-wheelbase station wagon . . . 342 Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Message in the multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Washing the vehicle High-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . 287 Wearing seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261, 422 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261, 422 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Interchanging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Where will I find...? . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Window heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Windows Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Windscreen Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Windscreen heating* . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Windscreen washer system . . . . . . 259 Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Windscreen wipers Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Jammed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . 366
443
Index
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . 17, 179 Intermittent wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Rapid wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 179 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Wiping with washer fluid . . . . . . . . . 42 Winter diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Wiper blades Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
444
Contact Mercedes-Benz will be happy to answer any questions you may have: Mercedes-Benz Contact Telephone: 00800 1 777 7777 International: +49 69 95 30 72 77 Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about DaimlerChrysler can be found on the following websites: www.mercedes-benz.com www.daimlerchrysler.com
Editorial office You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you might have regarding the Owner's Manual to the technical documentation team at the following address: DaimlerChrysler AG, HPC: R824, 70546 Stuttgart, Germany Editorial status: 23.12.2003 Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission.
Illustrations Title illustration At a glance Getting started Safety Controls in detail Operation Practical advice Technical data P00.01-2271-31 P00.01-2343-31 P00.01-2344-31 P00.01-2345-31 P00.01-22346-31 P00.01-2347-31 P00.01-22348-31 P00.01-2349-31
463 584 36 81h

Order no. 6515 4058 02 Part no. 463 584 36 81 EN Edition D1, 01/04

W 463 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

W 463 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

W 463 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

G-Class Owner's Manual

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

404 405 405 408 409 411 411 412

Technical terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

An environmental note gives you tips on the protection of the environment.

A warning draws your attention to possible risks to your health or life.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Therefore, observe the following points: Operating conditions:

Your vehicle's operating conditions Your style of driving

You can influence both these factors.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Page 20, 130 252 29 119 40, 115 30 41 41 40, 121

Function 9 Cleans the headlamps a Cruise control lever:

Page 176 208 213 18, 126

Cruise control Speedtronic

Turn signals Windscreen wipers Main-beam headlamps

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

P54.30-6734-31 English (miles): P54.30-6735-31

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

313 312 313 129 129 171

137 143, 134 336 142 127 312 309

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Page 130 130

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Page 197 165 193 196 170 36

4 Heater booster system* 5 Engages the transfer case 6 Parking brake

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Page 239 124 122

Page 30, 179 240 240 122 122

Sliding sunroof* Cabriolet soft top

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Page 198 27 85 102

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Key with remote control

1 Locking button 2 Unlocking button

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Switch on the ignition. Turn the ignition 55 to position 2 (5 page 35).

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch

Steering wheel Risk of accident

Slide the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 5.

Head restraint angle